(logo)
(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Project Gutenberg | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Children's Library | Additional Collections

Search: Advanced Search

Anonymous User (login or join us)Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Standards in education with some consideration of their relation to industrial training"

STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

WITH SOME CONSIDERATION OF 
THEIR RELATION TO 

INDUSTRIAL TRAINING 



ARTHUR HENRY CHAMBERLAIN, B.S., A.M. 

DEAN AND PROFESSOR OF EDUCATION 
THROOP POLYTECHNIC INSTITUTE 




NEW YORK : CINCINNATI : CHICAGO 

AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 




COPYRIGHT, 1908, BY 
ARTHUR HENRY CHAMBERLAIN 

ENTERED AT STATIONERS' HALL, LONDON 
W. p. i 



INTRODUCTION 

THE following pages contain a brief discussion of the 
crucial factors in modern, particularly in modern elemen- 
tary education. Not only do the aims of education in 
general and the special elements in good character, re- 
ceive attention ; but the curriculum in the Elementary 
School, the method of its presentation, the method of 
training teachers, and the duties of parents toward school 
work, are also all included for discussion. Possibly the 
main criticism of the work is the fact that it undertakes 
altogether too much. Yet, that there is much need of 
good books of this kind on Education is not to be ques- 
tioned. 

The point of view represented by the author is very 
advantageous. While quite familiar with Elementary Ed- 
ucation in all its phases, he has received the training of 
the specialist in Industrial and Technical Education. 
He has made an advanced study of Educational problems 
at Columbia University, and has for some years been 
engaged in the training of teachers, and in administrative 
work in a school of technology. The problems here dis- 
cussed are, therefore, handled in a concrete way, and 
fully in the spirit of modern times. 

Inasmuch as the author frequently presents the views 

3 



4 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

of prominent authorities, in addition to his own, the book 
possesses the important advantage of real breadth of 
treatment. The theses, summarizing the substance of 
each chapter, are of much value, and the fact that they 
are placed at the close of each chapter, rather than at the 
beginning, is a detail of merit. The " Topics for Study " 
that in each case follow the theses, are extremely sug- 
gestive, and the definite references to works of recog- 
nized authority for a further study of these topics, 
map out the way for the student to post himself quite 
thoroughly on modern educational problems. 

FRANK M. McMuRRY. 
Teachers College, 
Columbia University. 



AUTHOR'S PREFACE 

FOR some years past the writer has been privileged to 
instruct in normal classes students preparing for the 
teaching profession, as well as those of experience in 
one or another field of educational service, and with him, 
as with others having to do with this particular problem, 
the question has frequently arisen : What text shall we 
use as the general basis for and guide in our work ? 

With the passing of the old pyschology pass also many 
of the books in this line. While with beginners, texts 
may be selected that will present the subject of psychol- 
ogy in such manner as to fit the student to study the 
facts of human nature, many of the texts on education 
attempt to cover such a broad field of psychology, peda- 
gogy and method as entirely to bewilder. Then, too, the 
more mature normal or training school student stands in 
need of a text that shall set forth certain of the great 
educational principles (or tJie principle of education, if 
you will), and lead to a consideration of the present 
needs of the school. The books on general pedagogy 
will not accomplish this, and the philosophic treatise 
touches one main issue simply, or is too technical for 
class use. 

In many of the books dealing with educational prob- 

5 



6 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

lems, the terms, references and phraseology used, imply 
a broader knowledge than that possessed by most teach- 
ers. Many of the books are written by specialists for 
specialists, and this fact alone carries them beyond the 
range of the majority of teachers. The present volume 
has been prepared for the parent and the general reader 
as well as for the pedagogue and the student. It is in- 
tended to have a relation to life as well as to lessons, and to 
show how the life at school and the life outside of school 
may be conducted in harmony toward a common end. 

It seems to be clear that the student needs not so much 
an exposition of theories or a philosophic or historic 
treatise, as the knowledge of a few fundamental facts 
and principles regarding his profession and his relation 
to it ; an understanding of the purpose of education and 
the reasons for the establishment of the curriculum he 
uses. In discussing the value of educational systems, 
we must look not merely to the number and character 
of school buildings, to libraries and equipments, to the 
amount of moneys expended, and to the material results 
of the student's work. The true value or worth of any 
system of education is to be found within the individuals 
themselves, the product of the school. We must apply 
a dynamic, rather than an external test, when we at- 
tempt to formulate standards. 

In the pages that follow the endeavor has been made 
to meet these requirements. The book is intended to be 
suggestive rather than exhaustive, the author making no 
claim to completeness. He has to ask himself many of 



AUTHOR'S 



the questions herein asked the student. Education in its 
formative period many times falls short of exact defini- 
tions, and education at its best is hardly a matter of 
statistics. The aim, too, has been to avoid the use of 
terms that in themselves need defining, the thought 
being that a simple form of expression would best suit 
the purpose of the book, whether used as a text, as a 
basis for study and discussion in class, as a reference 
book, or as a work for the general reader. While cer- 
tain of the principles touched upon apply equally to all 
fields of school instruction, the book is intended mainly 
for those interested in the problems of elementary 
education. 

In the attempt to make the pages readable, illustra- 
tion has been resorted to frequently. At the close of 
each chapter a general summary is given as a recapitu- 
lation. The " Topics for Study " following each chap- 
ter will be found particularly helpful as suggestive of the 
various important questions' and issues that may be taken 
up in detail, or of which implication is made in the text. 
The student will be able to amplify this list. It has not 
seemed wise to burden the text with foot-note references 
which the reader will never look up, but under the head 
" Consult " will be found a list of the more important 
books and references on a given topic. 

Whatever is said of the school of the past is said not in 
the spirit of carping criticism, but that the demand for 
something broader and more rational in our schools may 
be made clear. This demand for a purposeful curriculum 



8 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

has made necessary many times a repetition in form of 
expression or in statement, which it has not always seemed 
wise to eliminate. 

The author finds great difficulty in making the usual 
statement of obligation and indebtedness to those who 
have given him help and inspiration, the number being 
almost as large as the great body of teachers with whom 
he has come in contact. Not only is he indebted to those 
whose words are quoted in these pages and to many other 
writers and teachers, but to that large number of sincere, 
zealous, noble-hearted men and women, called the com- 
mon school teachers, without whom the great work of 
education would be impossible. 

The writer cannot refrain, however, from expressing 
his special indebtedness to one who not only with his pen, 
but by voice and presence gave to him, as he gave to 
hundreds of others, his first clear conception of the real 
meaning of teaching. He consulted with Colonel Francis 
W. Parker, upon the content of the present volume, only 
a few days before the latter's untimely death and feels that 
he cannot do better than here repeat what he then wrote. 
" No other name has been so closely interwoven with edu- 
cational thought and practice as has his. The measures 
that the Colonel advocated three decades past, and for 
which he was then derided and ridiculed, are to-day prac- 
tised in every good school in the land. Look as we may 
for the cause of the better and more common sense 
methods in the primary education of to-day, and we find 
it was the changes and reforms that the Colonel advo- 



AUTHOR'S 



cated and used years ago in the schools at Quincy and 
at the Cook County Normal School. 

" What sympathy he had for the struggling teacher, 
what love for the child, what reverence for the Infinite, 
what hatred for selfishness and wrong, what hope for 
humanity. To see him was an inspiration, to hear him 
speak was a mental and spiritual uplift, to work with him 
a revelation. Through his efforts the work of the teacher 
has been elevated from a vocation to the chiefest of pro- 
fessions. The study of pedagogy has through his teach- 
ing been made real and tangible. He has proven to all 
the world that the school should exist for the child, that 
in it the child should find his fullest expression and be 
led to expand and grow into his perfect self." 

He wishes also to acknowledge the assistance given by 
his friend and teacher, Doctor Frank M. McMurry of 
Teachers College, Columbia University, who has been 
kind enough to read these pages and to write an intro- 
duction for the book ; and to express his gratitude to 
Miss Kathrine Lois Scobey of the University School, 
Chicago, for her careful criticism and helpful suggestion, 
and to his brother, Professor James Franklin Chamber- 
lain of the State Normal School, Los Angeles, who has 
worked through every page of the manuscript. He is 
indebted to Mr. James C. Miller of the Provincial Nor- 
mal School, Calgary, Canada, for valuable assistance, and 
to Professor Charles Emory Barber of Throop Poly- 
technic Institute, who has read the proof and made the 
analytical table of contents. 



io STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

His hope is that those who study these pages may be 
led to a fuller realization than that commonly held of 
the meaning of the school and of education. 

A. H. C. 
Throop Polytechnic Institute, 

Pasadena, California. 



TABLE OF CONTENTS 

CHAPTER I 

PAGE 

THE AIM OF EDUCATION 19 

Universal recognition of the necessity for education The at- 
tempts to establish an ideal in education Lack of harmony 
between the Real and the Ideal Notwithstanding the fail- 
ure to realize the Ideal, every age has developed great men 
Difficulty of evaluating the Ideal of another Plato and the 
Practical Aristotle and the Ideal The problem of Edu- 
cation Dual nature of this problem: how to develop the 
individual and to preserve his subserviency to society This 
duality not antagonistic; society and the individual insep- 
arable from each other The modern school weak on the 
sociological side The standard is defective; it does not give 
due emphasis to social obligation Relation of culture, dis- 
cipline and knowledge Differentiation of matter and 
method Education builds for the future: hence cannot be 
exclusively "practical" Psycho-sociological elements of 
self-control, responsibility, leadership Development of 
originality and indivicfcuality that is initiative. 

CHAPTER II 

THE ELEMENTARY CURRICULUM: ITS MOTIVE AND 
CONTENT 37 

The educational unrest Unrest first noticeable in secondary 
schools Practice not in harmony with standards In prac- 
tice the school is arranged for the few rather than for the 
many The elementary school most important because 
ii 



12 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

PAGE 

fundamental Elementary curriculum out of adjustment 
Curriculum does not square with life Causes of discontin- 
uance in school The knowledge of most worth The 
broadening of programs has frequently shallowed results 
Necessity for adjustment as seen in the teaching of arithme- 
ticIn the teaching of language In the teaching of 
geography In the industrial arts Expression as essential 
as impression The thought side in industrial processes 
should have more emphasis Industrial training a most 
valuable element in development The old Psychology out- 
grownThe hand and the brain should act in unison 
Complexity of society such that present industrial bias 
reaches every member of it The metamorphic period in 
Education; Dr. Hall's characterization Personality of the 
teacher a vital factor in readjustment Readjustment nec- 
essary because of new interpretation of life and new stand- 
ards School not apart from life but a part of life Cur- 
riculum must be actually in accord with the spirit of the age 
Relation of school life to civic life must be clear to teacher 
and pupil. 

CHAPTER III 

INDUSTRIAL TRAINING: ITS AIM AND SCOPE ... 68 
The traditional subjects and their development The intro- 
duction of "manual training" Inadequacy of the term 
"manual training" Reasons for manual training in the 
curriculum essentially the same as reasons for the other sub- 
jects Special reasons advanced Appreciation of the dig- 
nity of labor Satisfaction of creative activity of the child 
Development of understanding of our industrial life 
Recreation resulting from a change of occupation Promo- 
tion of physical development Elevates moral standards 
Develops manual dexterity May serve as a foundation 



TABLE OF CONTENTS 13 

PAGE 

for trades Reenforces and clarifies the traditional "book 
subjects" Typical systems of manual training The 
exercise system as developed in Russia The completed- 
model system: Sloydin Sweden The rigid systematizing 
of sloyd in America devitalizes it Manual training may 
degenerate into lessons rather than life Many teachers fail 
to appreciate the underlying principles Others fail to ad- 
just these principles to a growing child in a changing en- 
vironment An illustration from the Philippines Shall 
boys and girls have the same work ? Shall the occupation 
be fitted to the child, or the child to the occupation ? Tech- 
nique not the end of work Danger of too great freedom 
in self-expression and initiative Great value of industrial 
art is its assistance to the child in the conquest of his en- 
vironment. 

CHAPTER IV 
THE MEANING OF CORRELATION 102 

Correlation, concentration, coordination require definition 
Concentration as defined by Herbart Meaning of inter- 
relation The group-idea in correlation; coordinate groups 
The individual subject of study as a center; concentration 
The child as the real center toward which effort is di- 
rected Humanistic and formal studies Development 
means conformity to law Self -activity a governing force 
Distinction between correlation and concentration In- 
definiteness of pedagogical nomenclature Distinction be- 
tween coordination and concentration Unification and 
isolation Coordination and the group-idea Correlation 
in coordinate groups Unification and relative values 
Reasons for unity found in the individual Correlation not 
possible at every point Correlation finds greatest op- 
portunity in lower grades Correlation only the " logical 



14 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

PAGE 

balance" Social and industrial conditions of to-day re- 
quires a unifying of the elementary curriculum. 

CHAPTER V 
THE BASIS OF ETHICAL TRAINING 118 

Increasing necessity for moral training in a nation so strongly 
filled with the spirit of indiridualism The school, being 
life in minature, is the natural teacher of morals Early 
moral instruction not separable from religious instruction 
The fundamental purposes of the school Formal moral 
instruction lacking in vitality The child should see that 
ethics must appear in the concrete as conduct Character 
a part of, not apart from, daily life. 

(a) Interest: Interest is vital in any instruction The child 
interested in things before symbols School too often ut- 
terly unlike life Some reasons for the study of that which 
does not interest The fighting impulse, the desire for 
mastery must be aroused The easy task not necessarily 
interesting The difficult task not necessarily uninteresting 
The knowledge of a dominant interest the teacher's ally. 

(b) Attention: Voluntary and involuntary attention Atten- 
tion without effort Involuntary attention develops into 
voluntary attention Overtaxing may lead to instability in 
mental attitude. 

(c) Discipline: Close relation of interest and attention to 
discipline Outward sign of discipline The discovery of 
the dominant interest may turn a refractory boy Obe- 
dience must become choice Actual cooperation difficult to 
secure Obedience and character Rules underlying dis- 
cipline: regularity, punctuality, silence, industry Interre- 
lation of society and the individual Morality not inherent; 
it must be developed Moral education not knowledge bat 
life Example and experience better than precept School 



TABLE OP CONTENTS 15 

PAGE 

the chief agency in the teaching of morals Morals and re- 
ligion Difficulty of separating religion from sectarian 
teaching Religious element essential to true morality 
Morals and the emotions He who feels the right has the 
advantage of him who merely knows the right. 

CHAPTER VI 
THE SIGNIFICANCE OF HABIT 149 

Habit a vital element in character An act done tends to de- 
velop a desire to repeat the act The blazed trail; the line of 
least resistance The parallel between the mental and the 
physical habit Building and breaking habits not reverse 
processes Habit is acquired only through doing: repeti- 
tion Difficulty of breaking old habits The readiest way 
is to substitute the new In acquiring habits the mind and 
body must be kept occupied. 

CHAPTER VII 
THE CURRICULUM IN OPERATION 158 

Formal discipline and mental development Impossibility of 
grasping all knowledge The ideals of school and of life 
identical The old and the "new" education A unified 
course of seven groups correlated. 

(a) Physical Training and Its Place: Necessity for physical 
training Need of supervision and systematization Sug- 
gestions for schools without special equipment Danger 
of overstrain Athletics: some arguments in their favor 
Competition and specialization Professionalism and its 
dangers Some data in track and field athletics, football 
and baseball Athletics should be for all, and should in- 
crease standards of efficiency in scholarship Physical con- 
dition in the schoolroom The teacher and the games. 

(b) The Industrial Arts and Their Place: Clay-modeling, 



1 6 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

PAGE 

tiles, pottery Basketry and weaving Paper and card- 
board Metal-work, bent iron, copper, brass, etc. Wood- 
work. 

CHAPTER VIII 
STUDY AND PREPARATION 189 

(a) At Home: Why home study has seemed necessary The 
danger of overburdening young children The lack of di- 
rection in study at home Responsibility rests upon both 
teacher and parent Much of the danger avoided if home 
work be made chiefly along industrial lines. 

(b) At School: School rather than the home the place for 
formal study Necessity of learning how to study The 
advantage of the study -recitation. 

CHAPTER IX 

THE RECITATION PROCESS 199 

(a) Selection of Material: No method without matter Local 
conditions determine the subjects to be studied The 
curriculum should be both interesting and serviceable 
Text -books as guides Teachers should have much liberty 
of choice in selecting material, as they are responsible for 
results Text-books, and subsidiary study from reading, 
conversation, observation and experience. 

(b) Development of the Plan: A lesson worth giving is worth 
planning Circumstances may alter the routine of the 
plan The plan lessens danger of haphazard work. 

(c) Assignment of Lesson: The topic The value of definite 
assignment The pupil a judge of his own ability He is 
not to be deprived of his privilege of effort. 

(d) How to Study: Concentration Clear thinking and 
exact expression Individual thought to be encouraged 
Kindergarten methods in the upper grades. 



TABLE OF CONTENTS 17 

PAOl 

(e) Hearing the. Lesson vs. Teaching: The question and 
answer method The teacher's contribution The study - 
recitation The art of questioning The pupil as teacher 
Encouragement as necessary as adverse criticism Exam- 
inations: their value and their danger. 

CHAPTER X 

TRAINING, PROFESSIONAL GROWTH AND RECOMPENSE 
OF THE TEACHER 219 

(A) INITIAL PREPARATION 

(a) Knowledge of Subject-Matter: High School requirements 
for admission to Normal Schools Subject-matter and 
method. 

(b) Value of Psychology: Psychology the interpretation of 
human nature Its difficulties Laws vs. the application of 
laws A misfit in text-books Vague terminology in psy- 
chology The value of experience. 

(c) Attitude of Prospective Teacher: Reasons for entering the 
profession Attitude of the High School is academic At- 
titude of the Normal School is professional The teacher 
is a stimulator of thought. 

(d) Ability to Teach: Selective province of the Training School. 

(B) THE TEACHER'S READING 

The value of books Discrimination in reading Reading 
and discussion Read and criticise, compare, and judge 

(C) THE TEACHER'S ASSOCIATES 
Benefits of association The teacher's place in society. 

(D) CONTACT WITH THE ISSUES OF LIFE 
(a) Standards of Morality: Advantage of a wide range of in- 
terests Elevation of moral standards. 
Standards 2 



i8 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

(b) Material and Industrial Development: The teacher in 
touch with commercial and industrial interests The va- 
rious problems of daily life have a relation to school life. 

(c) ^Esthetic Feeling: Culture and the Arts. 

(E) READING CIRCLES, EXTENSION COURSES, CORRE- 

SPONDENCE AND SUMMER SCHOOLS 

(F) TEACHERS' MEETINGS, INSTITUTES, AND CONVENTIONS 

(G) QUALITIES ESSENTIAL TO GROWTH 
Honesty Open-mindedness Spirit of responsibility Fear- 
lessness Simplicity Tactfulness Willingness and the 
gospel of work Order and system Discrimination, con- 
centration, judgment. 

(H) THE RECOMPENSE 

Not to be measured in terms of dollars or honors, but in terms 
of value of service. 



STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

CHAPTER I 
THE AIM OF EDUCATION 

MORE than a century past, our fathers, single minded 
to the best interests of education, essayed to enunciate 
what to us still seems to be a fundamental principle, that 
"religion, morality and knowledge being necessary to 
good government and the happiness of mankind, schools 
and the means of education shall ever be en- 
Necessity couraged." At all times and in all places 

for Educa- . 

tionhashad education of one kind or another has been 
Recognition ne ^ to ^ e a necess ity> looking toward the best 
and fullest development of the individuals in a 
tribe, community or nation. The question has never 
been, " Shall we educate ? " The query rather has been, 
" What shall we study, and how ? " But a hundred 
years in the study of educational thought and achieve- 
ment is as yesterday. The dweller in early Egypt, in 
Babylon, in Assyria, and in Phoenicia, the Persian and 
the Roman, the Greek and the Hindu, the Jew and the 
Japanese, each has endeavored in his own way to work 
out his individual problems, and consciously or uncon- 
sciously to follow Paul's admonition : " Prove all things ; 
hold fast that which is good." 

19 



20 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

Education has long been denned, but as we to-day 
glance back over the centuries we find it difficult to true 
the definition of any particular people to the practice of 
their educational doctrine, much less are we able to 
square the practice of yesterday with the theory of to- 
morrow. And whatever may be said of the needs and 
necessities of those who have so worthily 
preceded us, or of the broad strides educa- 
ti on has taken, there can be no doubt that 
to-day, as never before, we are looking for 
the prophet to lead us, and more than ever before are 
realizing that the mighty dynamic changes in our indus- 
trial and social atmosphere demand that a deeper and 
more significant interpretation be placed upon our defini- 
tion of education, and that the practices thereof be laid 
in accordance with such interpretation. 

Here and there the worth of a system is exemplified 
in the life and achievement of a great soul. 
More than four centuries before Christ and 



upon the plains a short call from Rome, a 
product of the education of the day left his 
plow in the furrow and with the sword of the soldier and 
the robe of the dictator, between sunset and sunset, 
saved the Roman army from defeat. Then, leaving 
power, and glory, and the acclaim of the multitude, Cin- 
cinnatus returned to the occupation of his fathers. Al- 
fred, gathering his Saxons to drive out the invading hosts, 
Columbus, seeking a new world through uncharted seas, 
Luther, thundering for reforms in church administration, 



THE AIM OF EDUCATION 21 

Washington, upholding a nation's courage at Valley 
Forge, "dumb for himself unless it were to God, but for 
his barefoot soldiers eloquent," Lincoln, striking the 
shackles from millions of slaves, the work of these as 
teachers of men is clearly traced upon the pages of his- 
tory and reflected in the lives of their fellows. 

Often enough do we listen to the words of the philoso- 
pher on the meaning of school, to the ideal utterances of 
the theorist, to the academic statements of the narrow- 
minded and conservative, and often enough do we con- 
demn the results achieved in the past as spiritless and 
formal. What call, however, have we to criticise the 
work of an Aristotle or a Herbart, a Bacon 
Peonaf or an Erasmus ? For has it not been written 
standards to as much for the educationalist as for the 
other money changers, " Who shall ascend into the 

hill of the Lord?" And the answer: Not 
the rich, necessarily, nor the powerful nor the gifted, but 
" he that hath clean hands and a pure heart." 

How difficult then to analyze the word or work of 
another. For Plato, education must make only for spir- 
itual growth and with him spiritual development had 
nothing in common with the material world. To think 
of the present was not to be tolerated, for he tells us 
in the Republic that " practical arts are degrading." 
Hence, all training must be of that ideal character that 
shall consider only a future state. The philosophy of 
Plato here seems to be narrowing ; but as Putnam points 
out, it was after all Plato whose writings seem to have 



22 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

forecast the modern kindergarten and the doctrine of 
"learning to do by doing."* 

Aristotle, on the other hand, seems to be the warm 
humanist who plans to meet the requirements of every- 
day life and who insists that perfect citizenship is the 
goal toward which education should tend. We gather 
from Aristotle's Politics, that if a man prove virtuous in 
character, no further concern need be felt for his future. 
Nevertheless, the so-called practical does not cover the 
whole of the Aristotelian philosophy. Note what he 
says : " To be always in quest of what is useful is not 
becoming to high minded men and freemen." And in a 
study of other great minds, Socrates and Seneca, Agric- 
ola and Sturm, Ascham, Rabelais, Bacon, Comenius, 
Francke, Rousseau, Froebel, Spencer, Locke and Mann, 
it is found that all have agreed and disagreed, and that 
as yet no one has entirely erected the superstructure of 
the education needed to-day. 

It is held by some that education is the reconstruction 
of experience. They believe that neither preparation for 
life, nor information, is the goal, but hold with Aristotle 
that to work toward an ultimate moral character simply, 
is to stop short of the desired end. It is always neces- 
sary, I believe, in such an undertaking as the one in which 
we are now engaged, to pause, and, following the lead of 
Daniel Webster, to return to the original point of de- 
parture that we may be sure of having an established 
premise. 

* A Manual of Pedagogics, p. 17. 



THE AIM OF EDUCATION 23 

The question then is : For what does the school stand ? 

What is education ? Education, say some, is 

Question,- training for life. To which answer is made 

The Aim of that it is more than a training for life ; it is 

Education 

life itself. To meet such a requirement edu- 
cation should bring into action all the abilities of the pupil, 
or, as O'Shea puts it, "the ideal attributes that exist in 
potentia in the human spirit." * It should develop in 
him all essential qualities and virtues, should make him 
master of himself mentally, physically, and morally, should 
help him to appreciate and value only the good and to dis- 
card the relatively bad, should prepare him for more com- 
plete living ; should in short, be the means by which he 
shall be enabled to take his place in the great world of 
life and action as a unit in a complete social order. If 
the lesson to be learned is that of mutual helpfulness, then 
education should look toward teaching men how best to 
perform this service. 

It seems to be plain that any education worthy the 
name, considers the present as well as the future of the 
individual, or to put it another way, considers the present 
and hence the future of the individual. Characters must 
be formed, not alone that ultimate good may be accom- 
plished, but that the standards of society may be raised 
here and now. 

This brings us at once to the dual nature of our prob- 
lem the individual upon the one hand, and society 
upon the other ; and hence, the psychological and the 

* Education as Adjustment, p. 62. 



24 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

sociological elements are both to be considered. The 
T ^-^ i relation of the individual to society gives us 

Individual ' ** 

vs. society ; the sociological view, while the psychological 
i?au h nd- aspects are determined by the relation of 
cioiogicai tne individual to himself. 

Elements . . . 

Society is made up of a group of individu- 
als. The individual lives in society, is a part of society, 
is responsible to society, and helps to determine and mold 
the tone or character of the social atmosphere. Society, 
however, sets the standards, and the individual must con- 
form, in great measure, to these standards as set. On 
the other hand, while being responsible and owing du- 
ties to society, the individual must demand something of 
himself as well. But while these two sets of duties, of in- 
dividual to society, and of individual to self, are distinct 
and may be segregated, the one from the other, there is 
no sharp line of demarcation between the two. That is, 
the one cannot be considered, practically, without the 
other, for what is best for the individual is best for society ; 
and conversely, what is for the best interests of society 
will prove of greatest value to the individual. 

Professor MacVannel points out* that just as the in- 
dividual is a unity whose life is in the proc- 
ess of ma king, of organization, so is he also 
the interest a unity in, or an intrinsic part of, a larger unity 

of the Indi- 

viduai of society which is in the process of organi- 

zation as well. If society is to perpetuate 

*"The Philosophy of Education," Teachers College Record, vol. 5, 
no. 4, sec. 5. 



THE AIM OF EDUCATION 25 

and strengthen itself, and if the individual is to exist and 
prosper, the latter must, many times, merge his desires 
in the will of society, and to a greater or less degree for- 
sake personal or selfish ends for the common well-being. 
In the material world this duality of psychological 
and sociological elements is noted. Society demands 
an article, a brick, it may be, or a dynamo, or a bucket. 
Society needs the article and thereby sets the standard. 
The What is the social phase of our problem. How to 
produce the article, to carry it over in the various proc- 
esses of manufacture from the raw material to the com- 
pleted state, to transport from place to place, the cheap- 
est and most effective methods of advertising, these 
have to do with the psychological phase. 

That raw materials of the average present day cur- 
riculum are not designed to touch deeply the 
sociological element in experience can readily 



sociological be shown. The evolutionary process, the un- 
foldment of the child's powers, presupposes 
a widening of the child's experience, a growth from 
within, through the presentation of certain study mate- 
rials. But the boy or the girl, the product of the school, 
has little opportunity to react upon society. Or per- 
haps one might better say the individual has not gained 
that which will enable him to react with profit upon so- 
ciety. Knowledge is not power, unless knowledge can 
be transformed into terms of power producing energy. 
The mere knowing a thing is not always significant in 
itself. The thing known must have some relation to the 



26 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

conditions, the needs, the desires, the life, of the society 
of which the individual is only one of the component 
parts. The facts of knowledge must be capable of ap- 
plication looking towards the satisfying of needs and the 
raising of standards, and the training of the individual 
must be such as to make possible the interpretation of 
such application. 

But the question is here raised : How does it happen 
that the raw materials of which we have been speaking, 
the school studies, have not been such as to meet the 
sociological and the psychological demands ? Have the 
school men of the past been blind to the interests of 
society ? Has too little thought been used in consider- 
ing the best development of the individual ? It may be 
answered, I submit, that the standard of the school has 
sprung from the belief that knowledge is power, that 
facts educate, that mental gymnastics produce the man. 
The standard of the real school must be found in actual 
life. It must be based upon the natural 
^ tendencies of the individual ; it must grow 

standards out of a knowledge of the child as a social 

should be , . 

Found being ; it must recognize the home, the com- 

munity, the factory, the shop, the farm ; it 
must consider civil, industrial, social and moral institu- 
tions. Any curriculum worthy a place in our schools 
must be built upon a clear conception that reason stands 
superior to fact, that expression is worth more than 
technique, that human sympathy transcends in value the 
printed pages of a book. 



THE AIM OF EDUCATION 27 

According as we hold one or another view of the un- 
derlying principles of education and of the 

i8 ~ real P rovince of tne SChool, do we trans- 



Information late the school studies into terms of value 
and attribute to them relative worths. To 
some the school stands for culture, and the curriculum 
should be so ordered as to promote this culture side of 
the child's life. Some think rather in terms of disci- 
pline and insist that school studies should make for this 
end. Others again would place information as the chief 
element to be considered. Shall the value of school 
studies, however, be found to exist within the studies 
themselves and is it to be determined by the nature of such 
studies ? If society sets the standard, how can there be 
several possible values ? With several standards set up, 
there is, as Dr. Dewey says, "no conception of any sin- 
gle unifying principle the extent and way in which a 
study brings the pupil to consciousness of his social en- 
vironment, and confers upon him the ability to interpret 
his own powers from the standpoint of their possibilities 
in social use, is the ultimate and unified standard." * 

It is, of course, unsafe to say that mathematics and 
the languages make for discipline chiefly, that the study 
of English brings culture, that history lends itself to the 
informational side of development. The fact is that 
under the best conditions, mathematics is cultural and 
informational as well as disciplinary in value ; the Eng- 
lish group of studies may be made to cover as wide a 

* Ethical Principles Underlying Education, p. 1 8. 



28 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

field as mathematics and Latin, while history may bring 
as complete a development as any school subject. To 
say that one study makes for culture and another for 
discipline means simply that the standard for culture or 
for discipline comes from the individual, not from society. 
Culture, in the terms of our discussion, means possibili- 
ties for development, open mindedness, honesty, the 
sense of service awakened, not merely varnish and 
veneer. Information implies knowledge, to be sure, but 
knowledge that not only can be used, but that is carried 
over and made a part of the lives of others to the end 
that all are advantaged thereby. Discipline suggests 
not only the analytic mind and the trained muscle, but 
the sympathetic soul and the teachable spirit as well. 

In this connection, notice how broad is the definition 
of culture as given by Bosenquet. " Culture," he says, 
" is the habit of mind instinct with purpose, conscious of 
the continuity and connection of human events, able and 
industrious ; capable of discriminating the great from the 
trivial." 

Method, too, is a determining element in the value of 
studies, for the comparative worth of any given body of 
subject-matter to the individual, or to society, is deter- 
mined in no small degree by the manner of 
presentation. While it is true that subject- 



subject- matter and method are not distinct, but ex- 

Matter and . 

Method ist as two sides of experience, the psycholog- 

ical and the social, it remains to be said, 
however, that for the practical purposes of the teacher 



THE AIM OF EDUCATION 29 

and the school, it is eminently necessary that they 
be clearly distinguished, the one from the other. It 
has long been insisted by some, and assumed by others, 
that in a course of training, for example, the method was 
of chief concern : that if the teacher in embryo could 
secure a knowledge of method, an understanding of how 
to do the given thing, that a knowledge of subject-matter 
itself, of the definite facts connected with the particular 
line of work, could be somehow grasped at a later time. 
The fallacy of this view is apparent to all who consent 
for a moment to consider seriously the issues involved. 
How utterly inconsistent to endeavor to formulate a 
method, or to act intelligently under one, until a knowl- 
edge is had of that upon which method is based. Many 
of our normal schools have this lesson yet to learn, and 
educational institutions the country over, not only of ele- 
mentary and secondary, but of collegiate grade, would do 
well to select the subject-matter of the curriculum with 
more care than has been manifest in the past. Indeed 
the necessity for a knowledge of subject-matter be- 
fore training or method work is attempted, is one of 
the strongest possible arguments in favor of normal 
and professional schools admitting as students only 
those who have had a previous thorough, academic 
training. Once subject-matter has been selected in 
any school, the work should be made more intensive 
than we now find it more intensive from the stand- 
point of thought values, and also from that of exe- 
cution. 



3 o STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

All this does not in any manner whatsoever contradict 

what has been said previously regarding 

present a thought and expression being paramount. 

well as Fu- , , 

ture Needs It means that a knowledge at first hand 
sidere C d n " of things that have a valid place in society, 
not only for the future but in the present, 
is to be the first essential. It means, as Dr. Dewey 
tells us, that " The present has its claims. It is in edu- 
cation, if anywhere, that the claims of the present 
should be controlling," and this is in accord with the 
words of President Butler, " Education is the adjust- 
ment of the individual to the spiritual possessions of the 
race." It means what Browning means, when he says : 

"Let things be not seem, 
I counsel rather, do and nowise dream! 
Earth's young significance is all to learn; 
The dead Greek lore lies buried in the Urn, 
Where he who seeks fire finds ashes." 

And self-control, leadership, responsibility is it the 
duty of the school to undertake the task of 

Self-Control, , M ,, -, 

Leadership, inculcating m its pupils these elements so 
andRespon- essential to success? Must the time be 

sibility in 

the school placed, and the thought of education be cen- 
tered, upon these factors, when it might be 
troubling itself with the real facts of knowledge ? The 
question is put only to have one answer returned. What 
of the city where the members of the police number as 
many as the teachers engaged in the schools ? What of 
houses of correction, of the institutions of reform, the 



THE AIM OF EDUCATION 31 

prisons, the courts of justice, and to a lesser extent of the 
hospitals, asylums, and homes for the unfortunate and 
distressed ? In the lack of self-control, in the inability to 
interpret properly the demands of society or to perform 
its duties, having learned them, in unstableness of char- 
acter, to the end that the right is lost sight of and the 
stronger powers of leadership in others prevail, is found 
the cause of much of the weakness underlying our social 
organization. Could the school teach effectively the 
lesson of self-control, we need have little fear of results 
when the product of the system is thrown among the 
currents of the world. " What now is the most impor- 
tant attribute of man as a moral being ? May we not 
answer, the faculty of self-control ? This it is which 
forms a chief distinction between the human being and 
the brute. It is in virtue of this that man is defined as 
a creature ' looking before and after.' It is in their larger 
endowment of this that the civilized races are superior to 
the savage. In supremacy of this consists one of the 
perfections of the ideal man." * And here the tact and 
ability of the teacher shows itself. It is the teacher who, 
at his best, stands between the child and the various ex- 
periences that await him. The teacher, from his larger 
store of knowledge, directs the child toward, and intro- 
duces him to, these forms of experience, which are es- 
pecially adapted to bring out and develop the element 
of control, pointing the way that the pupil may in 
the shortest possible time and with the least expendi- 

* Spencer : Social Statics, " The Rights of Children," p. 86. 



32 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

ture of misdirected energy, adjust himself to his environ- 

ment. 

Rigid adherence to tradition, extreme rulings, and 
deeply furrowed acceptances of the past do 
not lend themselves to initiative, to open- 



itiltive rln " mindedness to leadership, to self-control. 
What would have been the achievements of 
a Michael Angelo or a Raphael, a Wagner or a Beetho- 
ven, a Goethe or an Emerson, a Franklin or a Newton, 
a Gladstone or a Lincoln, had these minds not felt free 
to reach forth in any direction, free to accept all the in- 
spiration that came to them from the past, free to ignore 
all the narrowing influences so apparent in the life and 
work of most of us, free to express themselves naturally, 
and clearly, and without restraint ? 

William Wallace gives us as clear a statement as 
could well be formulated, of the ideal of an education 
that will educate. " Mental health and wealth," he says, 
"do not depend upon a mere accumulation of single 
facts, but upon solid ideas of what life is and ought to be, 
and what the world around us really means ; it does not 
lie in confinement to a fragmentary life, limited in its 
range of view, and moving forever in the same monoto- 
nous routine, but in a large and free scope of experience ; 
nor does it lie in the degree of variety and intensity to 
which we can bring our sensations and aspirations, but 
in acquiring the proper estimate of values, in calming 
the turmoil of temper and gaining at once sweetness 
and light, that gentle reasonableness which, though not 



THE AIM OF EDUCATION 33 

less free to receive impressions than in the beginning of 
life, is at the same time matured by experience to a 
wiser judgment of their comparative worth. The true 
idea of a fully developed personality does not consist 
merely in a keen intellectual acumen, nor in an intense 
but inactive susceptibility to the moods of happy feeling, 
nor in a perpetual unresting activity ; it involves a bal- 
ance of all these elements."* And this experience, 
these forces that play backward and forward, in school 
and out, touching the pupil in his every occupation, that 
have direct bearing upon his present and that can be 
appreciated by him, shall we not consider these rather 
than attempt to introduce him to vague and indefinite 
elements ? 

As I stood, some time since, beside the rude dwellings 
of a simple people in a western desert and watched the 
natives as they worked at rug weaving or in fashioning a 
basket, I recalled the question put to one of these people 
by an eastern woman : " Isn't it too bad," said she, "that 
you live so far away ? " And the native woman, re- 
turning a wondering glance, replied, " I don't live far 
away, I live right here." 

While the work of the school must be such as to 
fit those who form the school community to adjust 
themselves to the society in which they individually 
may find themselves, it must not be forgotten that 
the child can interpret only in the light of present 
experiences. 

* Lectures and Essays on Natural Theology and Ethics, p. 297. 
Standards 3 



34 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

THESES 

1. The value of education has been recognized by all 
peoples, but from various standpoints. 

2. The aim of education is the matter of chief con- 
cern at present. 

3. The consideration of the relation of the individual 
to society involves the study of two elements, the psy- 
chological and the sociological. 

4. In determining standards, culture, discipline and 
information values are variously considered as basic. 

5. Method and subject-matter are separate and dis- 
tinct factors. 

6. The school should inculcate in its members self- 
control, leadership, and responsibility, and thus develop 
initiative. 

TOPICS FOR STUDY 

1. What were the educational ideals in early Egypt, 
India, China ? Compare with our present standards. 

2. What important features of our present day educa- 
tion seem tc have had their foundations in the civiliza- 
tion of Greece and of Rome ? 

3. What are the main facts to be considered in en- 
deavoring to determine the aims of education ? 

4. Show that the acceptance of a common standard 
does not presuppose similar methods, or identical applica- 
tion of principles, in the working out of the problems in- 
volved. 



THE AIM OF EDUCATION 35 

5. Show how a knowledge of the past in history and 
achievement is of value in present-day development. 

6. When society " demands an article," does the de- 
mand originate with society or with an individual, one 
of the units of which society is composed ? Is this de- 
mand ever custom or fashion, and where do these origi- 
nate ? 

7. Consider the source of the tendency to retain the 
useful and to eliminate the superficial. Does the prin- 
ciple of the Biological Conception have any bearing or 
application here ? 

8. Discuss fully the value of pure knowledge ; of 
knowing for the sake of knowing without regard to ap- 
plication of facts of knowledge. 

9. Make a list of subjects that seem to lend them- 
selves chiefly to culture giving ; to information ; to dis- 
cipline. 

10. How are we to determine what subjects should be 
taught and the relative value of each ? 

11. Discuss the extent to which the school would be 
handicapped by the elimination of any one of the several 
subjects now taught. 

12. Compare the courses of study of the more im- 
portant normal schools of the country as to relative 
time spent upon the various educational courses, psy- 
chology, pedagogy, history of education, school law, 
methods, school economy, school management, school 
administration and the like, Can you reconcile the dis- 
crepancy between the time spent upon psychology and 



36 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

that given to consideration of the problems of school 
management ? 

CONSULT 

BAGLEY The Educative Process. 

BUTLER Meaning of Education, pp. 3-36. 

DEWEY School and Society. 

GORDY A Broader Elementary Education, chaps, i 

to 8, inc. 

GREENWOOD Successful Teaching, pp. 11-19. 
HANUS Educational Aims and Educational Values, 

chap. i. 

HERBART Science of Education, pp. 1-121. 
HINSDALE Art of Study, chap. 5. 

HORNE Psychological Principles of Education, pp. 1-79. 

McMuRRY Elements of General Method, chaps, i & 2, 

pp. 1-84. 
MONROE Text-Book in the History of Education, pp. 

1-220. 

MOORE Science of Study, chaps. 3, 4, & 5. 

O'SHEA Education as Adjustment, chaps. 4, 5, & 15. 

PAINTER Great Pedagogical Essays: 

( "Laws" of Plato, pp. 0-32. 
Selections \ _ .. . 

,. < Politics of Aristotle, pp. 34-60. 

( Horace Mann, pp. 385-398. 
PARKER Talks on Pedagogics, chaps, i & 16. 

PUTNAM Manual of Pedagogics, chaps, i & 13. 

SEELEY Elementary Pedagogy, chaps, i, 2, & 3. 

Foundation of Education, chaps. 20 & 21. 

History of Education, pp. 1-88. 
THORNDIKE Principles of Teaching, chaps, i, 15, & 16. 



CHAPTER II 

THE ELEMENTARY CURRICULUM: ITS 
MOTIVE AND CONTENT 

THE thoughts laid down in the following pages are 
centered around certain ideas which, less than a dec- 
ade ago, began to take definite shape in many minds. 
These ideas, while even now somewhat vague, were in the 
earlier days chaotic. Beginning about the time I have 
indicated, the student of education could not have failed 
to notice a certain unrest in matters educational ; an un- 
rest voicing and manifesting itself in somewhat different 
manner and with more positive expression than formerly. 

I am likely to be reminded that this unrest took shape 

full three decades past and that a constant 

An Educa- change and steady advancement have been 

tional Unrest 

Noticeable noticeable ever since. Some are perhaps 
willing to go further and to say that since the 
times of John Locke and Comenius, of Rousseau and 
Pestalozzi, of Froebel and Herbart, educational thought 
and practice have ever been moving toward a higher 
level. More than this, we should probably all agree 
that certain fundamental principles laid down in Aris- 
totle's Ethics or in Plato's Republic, are not outgrown at 
the present day. 

37 



38 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

Granting this, however, we must admit that the past 
few years have wrought an additional change on the face 
of educational affairs. True, many do not see this; or 
seeing, will not admit. They must, however, eventually 
concede it. 

For a long time past it has been the secondary school 
that has first received the attention of educators, when a 
new order of things seems imminent or desirable in the 
public school. So in England, in Germany, in America, 
has the secondary condition been discussed. The full 
force and significance of these discussions is now being 
felt by what is far the most important and vital part of 
the whole educational organization of the present the 
elementary public school of America. 

Mr. Michael E. Sadler, a thorough English education- 
alist, has thrown much light upon the problem in his re- 
port on " The Unrest in Secondary Education in Ger- 
many and Elsewhere." * Other prominent German, 
English, and French school men have agitated the prob- 
lem, while with us, as exponents of a broader elemen- 
tary school curriculum, may be mentioned, Dr. William 
T. Harris, Professor John Fiske, Colonel Francis W. 
Parker, President Nicholas Murray Butler, President 
Charles W. Eliot, Dr. G. Stanley Hall, Professor William 
James, Dr. Frank M. McMurry, Professor John Dewey, 
not to speak of a host of others. These men have, each 
in his own way, been insistent in demanding in our school 
work something that shall be real rather than artificial, 

* Special Reports on Educational Subjects, vol. 9, pp. 1-191. 



THE ELEMENTARY CURRICULUM 39 

vital rather than indifferent. They have pleaded for an 
education such as has been aimed at, but is as yet far 
short of realization. 

Upon certain of the most important and fundamental 

principles underlying our educational fabric, 

Lack of Ap- there is and has been an almost unanimous 

plication of 

Principle agreement. It is only when we as individ- 
uals come to the practice of these princi- 
ples, only when an application is made, that a serious 
disagreement is noticeable. Indeed, it is only too fre- 
quently the case that no application is attempted. How 
clearly in the past has the purpose of the school been 
stated, and how almost universal has been the acceptance 
of the definition. In actual practice the work has not 
been in harmony with the stated purpose of the school. 
There is little contention as to the function the child is 
to serve when he becomes part of the world in which he 
shall eventually find himself. Our methods as practised, 
however, would be hardly recognizable as having any 
foundation in the thought for future citizenship. Theory 
and practice are at variance, and as a result violence has 
been done the child ; the past has kept its hold upon the 
school and we have held to old courses of study, dusty 
with layers of tradition, or mildewed by decades of 
bigotry. 

In some instances, to be sure, the better in the old ed- 
ucation has been displaced by the less valuable in the so- 
called new. Subject has been added to subject, scheme 
to scheme, creed to creed, until pupils and teachers alike 



4 o STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

find themselves in an educational maze, from which only 

the freedom of the outside world can extricate them. 

This unrest then, of which I have been speaking, is 

felt from the kindergarten through the uni- 

schooiAd- versitv. From what was at first a feeling, 

ministered J 

in the inter- there has developed a conviction that our 
Fe'w f * schools have too long existed for the benefit 

of the few. The upper grades are adminis- 
tered in the interest of the six per cent,* who pass from 
the primary years; high school courses of study are 
carried on with the view of meeting the requirements of 
a fortunate one per cent which is graduated from them ; 
while college and university curricula take into account 
only a meager number, who through circumstance or by 
birth are enabled to avail themselves of the advantages 
of a higher education. What our elementary schools 
should furnish above all else, is the elements of such 
culture and thought-bearing subjects as shall the better 
introduce the pupil into the social, the industrial, the 
moral life of the day. In this regard the school of ele- 
mentary grade is at present a long call from squaring 
with its avowed mission. 

The importance of our subject is apparent, for, with 
due regard to all kinds and grades of school work, we 
must recognize that the elementary is the most important 
school department. Why ? First, because it furnishes 
the foundation upon which the future educational super- 
structure must rest and has to do with the child at his 

*Report, Commissioner of Education^ 1903, vol. I, p. xvi. 



THE ELEMENTARY CURRICULUM 41 

most impressionable period, and second, because the great 
mass of children obtain all the school education they ever 
receive in the elementary school. 

We may therefore ask ourselves the following ques- 
tions : First, How does the elementary school of the pres- 
ent meet the demands imposed here and now ? Second, 
At what points in the curriculum is adjustment necessary ? 
Third, How may the proper conditions be brought about ? 

That our elementary schools are superior to those of 
the past there can be no question. It is just 
as true that the y do not meet the present 



notAde- day conditions and necessities. So strongly 

has the tide set in favor of something of a 
more rational nature, and so evidently has a feeling of 
unrest been sweeping over the country that many pro- 
gressive localities have already instituted radical changes ; 
and literature setting forth the real state of affairs and 
offering valuable suggestions as to the subject-matter of 
the curriculum has not been wanting. It is Emerson 
who says, " Is it possible that I who get indefinite quan- 
tities of sugar, hominy, cotton, buckets, crockery ware 
and letter paper, by simply signing my name to a check 
in favor of John Smith & Co., traders, get the fair share 
of exercise to my faculties by that act which nature in- 
tended for me, in making all these farfetched matters im- 
portant to my comfort ? It is Smith himself, and his 
carriers, and dealers and manufacturers ; it is the sailor, 
the hydrographer, the butcher, the negro, the hunter and 
the planter who intercepted the sugar of the sugar and 



42 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

the cotton of the cotton. They have got the education, 
I only the commodity." 

The great masses of boys and girls who are early 
compelled to take up the problems of actual 

ShouMTeet life > sh uld find in the SCh o1 that whkh haS 

the Needs of been prepared expressly for them and which 
best meets their needs. They find instead, 
work better suited to those who, whether they will or 
not, enter and take advantage of upper school work. 
With the proper adjustment of elementary school courses, 
all that great mass of pupils who leave below high school 
age would go out better prepared to take part in the 
life before them, and many who now leave school at an 
early age, would continue their work into and beyond the 
high school. 

To reach the great mass of boys and girls, and not 
only to reach them but to keep them in school for a 
somewhat longer period, is then our problem. The tend- 
ency of educational thought is to this end. His time 
in school is much too short for the boy to acquire those 
elements that make for moral uplift, industrial knowl- 
edge, social ideas and the faculty of leadership. The 
reader will appreciate, I am sure, that I have in mind the 
unnumbered many who progress no further than the ele- 
mentary school. 

Various are the causes of noncontinuance at school : 
poverty, sickness, overcrowding, poor enforcement of 
attendance laws, inability to keep pace with a given class, 
indifference, the monotonous grind of the ordinary re- 



THE ELEMENTARY CURRICULUM 43 

view all conspire to lessen the tuition in school. More 
than all else, however, and deeper and more 
No^contL- fundamental than these, is the fact that af- 
uance in ter the pupil enters the school, the latter does 

not furnish tJiat which is demanded in actual 
life. The supposition has been that the school is the 
medium through which the pupil is enabled to determine 
the line of work, occupation or profession he is best 
fitted to enter, after first bestowing upon him a general 
culture, universally essential. Should this be the correct 
view, which it probably is in part only, the present 
courses of study would not work to the desired end. 

In his masterful address before the Department of 
Superintendence at Atlanta, Georgia, Dr. Frank M. Mc- 
Murry charges that the common school curriculum is 
seriously overcrowded, but questions whether there is 
pressure from without. He says : " When we get be- 
yond the three R's, spelling, and a modicum of geog- 
raphy, and grammar, there is no public pressure brought 
to bear upon teachers compelling them to cover any 
recorded amount." * Is there pressure then from 
within ? Just as pressure is being brought to bear 
upon the high school by the university above it, so is 
the elementary school being unduly influenced by the 
school of secondary grade. As an example of this, our 
high schools all over the country have added to their 
courses advanced or university algebra. Mathematics 
teachers themselves admit that with the exception of a 

* Proceedings of the Department of Superintendence, 1904, p. 31. 



44 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

very few of those who pass on to the higher institutions 
of learning, the students will make little or no use of 
this study. It is exceedingly abstract and difficult ; and 
the time would better be spent upon some subject that 
is in fact of high school grade. In the same way the 
grammar grades are being afflicted with elementary al- 
gebra, with technical English, complicated grammatical 
forms and with a quantity of material that has no place 
below the high school. 

" To teach men how they may learn to grow independ- 
ently and for themselves is perhaps the greatest service 
that one man can do for another,"* says one ; but this 
cannot be done through the use of our present curricu- 
lum. " That knowledge is of most worth," says Presi- 
dent Jordan, " which can be most directly wrought into 
the fabric of our lives. That discipline of most value 
which will best serve us in quietly unfolding our own 
individualities." With a more serviceable curriculum, 
Ruskin would have had less cause to declare that 
"Modern Education for the most part signifies giving 
people the faculty of thinking wrongly on every conceiv- 
able subject of importance to them." No wonder the 
old song ran : 

"There's a lot of things that never go by rule; 
There's an awful lot of knowledge 
That you never get at college, 
There's a lot of things you never learn at school." 

* Jowett, in a letter to Palgrave: Life and Letters, Abbott and Camp- 
bell, vol. i, p. 414. 



THE ELEMENTARY CURRICULUM 45 

To speak further of the unfitness of the present day 
curriculum to meet present needs would be 

tO deal With P latitudes - Let "S Consider at 



all school what points adjustment maybe made. To 

Subjects \ J 1111. 

say where such adjustment should begin 
would be an almost hopeless task. In arithmetic and 
language, in history and geography, in reading, and even 
in more progressive schools, where such work is given as 
nature study, manual training and art subjects, the husk 
is too often mistaken for the kernel. The form rather 
than the content is made the chief issue; the symbol is 
made to stand for the thing. The spirit is lost, the 
letter is the goal. 

It is not my purpose to suggest an addition of subjects 
to an already overfull curriculum. I suggest rather an 
enrichment of the school work through a process of 
elimination, and by intensifying at many points. In the 
schools of the past the work was usually well done, 
and if the curriculum was narrow, meager and unin- 
viting, it was conscientious and thorough. Little by 
little, while our schools have increased in efficiency, they 
seem many times to have lost the thoroughgoing char- 
acter and sincerity so noticeable in those of former 
times. With an accumulation of subjects we must guard 
against superficiality and shallowness. It is now gener- 
ally admitted that we do not so much need additions to 
the curriculum in the form of new subjects, as a filtering 
out of subjects so that we shall teach and teach better 
only the essentials. 



46 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

In the elementary school it is perhaps in arithmetic 
and language, including reading, that the most pressing 
need of adjustment is seen. 

The object teaching in these subjects furnished an ad- 
vanced step over the older methods. But 
what do we find ? In arithmetic, for exam- 
ple, to use a crude illustration, the 2 + 2 = 4 problem, typi- 
cal of the abstract, lifeless form of work so long adhered 
to, was changed to the so-called concrete form, and read, 
two apples and two apples are four apples. A moment's 
thought, however, will convince us that the latter form 
of the problem lies nearly or quite as far from the con- 
crete as did the former. Here, too, it grows out of a 
mere statement of fact and not of the life interests of 
the pupil. It should find its application in an immediate 
need. " A thing is concrete when it is in the midst of 
its meanings ; a word to be concrete must not be disso- 
ciated from the idea for which it stands, but should ap- 
pear in its context, in the midst of its settings." * 

Much of the arithmetic now taught in the schools 
would come naturally to the pupil without the aid of 
school or teacher, if we could but be patient. On the 
other hand, it is not safe to say what portion of the en- 
tire arithmetic work would better be eliminated from the 
curriculum ; certainly a large part of it. I find children 
of sixth and seventh grade ability doing whole pages of 
problems under the heading time. After the table of 
measures has been committed, there are scores of prob- 

* Borrowed from Professor Frank M. McMurry. 



THE ELEMENTARY CURRICULUM 47 

1cm s of which this is a type : Multiply I hour, 14 min- 
utes and 25 seconds by 13. When questioned as to 
what they are doing, these pupils, as bright and well 
taught as the vast majority, answer that they are multi- 
plying. If questioned further as to why they are doing 
this particular thing, they say, " to get the answer." 

Ella Calista Wilson, in her recent book, Pedagogues 
and Parents, tells us that when a child she determined, 
as she put it, " to make a decent arithmetic " when she 
should be " big." What a commentary upon arithmetics 
and our use of them ! 

Look at it from whatever side you will, the idea is 
forced upon you that the curriculum of the elementary 
school is not calculated to meet the demands of the boy 
or girl. The child may be able to tell you the least 
common multiple of 4, 8 and 1 6, or the greatest common 
divisor of 3, 6 and 9, but it is doubtful if he can tell you 
why in New York City the market price per dozen of 
oranges is greater than that of apples, or why in certain 
parts of the country railroad engines use wood rather 
than coal for fuel. And the saddest part of the whole 
matter is that after he closes his arithmetic, the pupil will 
probably never have need for the facts he has learned re- 
garding the least common multiple or the greatest com- 
mon divisor. 

It may not be going too far to say that the newsboy 
upon the street, rough and unkempt, has a completer 
knowledge of arithmetic that fits for life than have his 
fellows in the school. It is recorded that a New Hamp- 



48 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

shire schoolboy, with the mountains for playmates, studied 
geology from a text-book, but was unable to say if he had 
ever seen an igneous rock. Thinking fathers and mothers 
are expressing a preference for the arithmetic given in 
the well-ordered commercial school, to that taught in the 
grades of the public school, and this for the simple rea- 
son that they find the former to be of actual value in the 
life work of the individual. 

At many points the arithmetic should be simplified 
and reduced. What necessity is there for spending so 
much time and energy upon such topics as Longitude 
and Time, Partial Payments, Involution, Evolution, Pro- 
gression, Least Common Multiple, Greatest Common Di- 
visor, complicated problems in Stocks and Bonds, and so 
on and so on ? Aside from something spoken of vaguely 
as mental discipline and development) the pupil gains lit- 
tle other than a bad conscience, an abhorrence for arith- 
metic and a dislike for school. 

Teachers constantly complain that students come to 
them lacking in knowledge of arithmetical processes and 
in ability to apply principles they are supposed to have 
learned. Surely this inability is not due to lack of time 
spent upon the subject of arithmetic, as in most schools 
it is upon the program continuously for the first eight 
years of school life. 

I have suggested that in language and reading adjust- 
ment is needed. One of the chief functions 

Language 

of the elementary school should be to give 
the child a love for reading and an appreciation for good 



THE ELEMENTARY CURRICULUM 49 

literature. To train in the use of simple, direct and cor- 
rect language is indeed a necessary part of the work. 
But above all else the child or the man who is not at 
home with books, who does not make friends with the 
finest in literature, who does not read and from his read- 
ing draw inspiration and enthusiasm and power for good, 
has been cheated of the best that the school should 
give. It is the book, many times, which keeps the 
boy from being idle. Idleness breeds crime ; and thous- 
ands of boys are idle because, as they say, there is 
nothing to do ; no place to go. Consequently they are 
often in the company of those from whom they learn 
only evil. 

In language work the child may be able to supply the 
missing words in the text, but does he contribute a read- 
able paper in the history class, or speak intelligently when 
giving an explanation ? In reading, the words may be 
spoken, but is the selection one having any connec- 
tion with the child's needs ? Will it broaden and deepen 
his sympathies, extend his knowledge of things worth 
while, and force him to feel, and be and live his better 
self? 

The reading matter offered the grammar-school boy 
or girl should be carefully selected and the pupil guided 
in his reading. The short stories of which the news- 
papers and magazines are now full are doing much to 
create fragmentary and unorganized reading. To inter- 
pret the printed page and to give meaning and life to the 
sentence is an art indeed. It is an uncommon experi- 

Standards 4 



50 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

ence to find a student of high school age who can gather 
from his reading the thought therein contained and give it 
clearly and easily to his listeners. In fact, the average 
pupil finds difficulty in reading properly his problem in 
arithmetic ; and failure in chemistry and physics is often 
due to faulty interpretation of the text. 

The subject of geography furnishes a further illustra- 
tion of the necessity for an adjustment of the 
elementary curriculum. Few teachers there 
are indeed, who have not, in some measure at least, swung 
away from the lifeless method of teaching geography 
from the text-book a method that assumes that geog- 
raphy teaching means the locating of cities, the bound- 
ing of states, and the tracing of water courses. For the 
most part, however, we find as yet very little of real ge- 
ography taught in the schools. Memory is relied upon ; 
thought is not developed. 

In a recent examination of text-books in geography, 
looking toward the adoption of a text for school use, ten 
books were chosen for examination and from these the 
five best were selected. As one test of the relative 
merits of these several texts, the following method was 
employed. Beginning in each text at the portion deal- 
ing with the United States, the first one hundred ques- 
tions were chosen. Out of these one hundred questions 
one book contained not a single question involving any 
element of thought ; a second book contained three ques- 
tions of thought value ; a third, eleven such questions ; a 
fourth, thirty-two ; and the fifth book, forty-seven. In 



THE ELEMENTARY CURRICULUM 51 

other words, our best texts in geography upon the market 
to-day, if we may judge upon the basis of this examination, 
consider memory work of more importance than thought 
processes. More value is placed upon the ability to lo- 
cate a mountain system upon the map or to name the 
three longest rivers in a given area, than to know why 
Chicago is situated advantageously as to commerce and 
manufacture, or why there is more rainfall in the Con- 
necticut valley than in southwestern New Mexico. 

No more, however, may the pupil's time be spent upon 
vague, indefinite things or upon those of little value : mere 
facts and figures, dates and places, locations, boundaries 
and battles. Each of these has a place, but to the grade 
pupil so much can be given that is rich and vitalizing 
that great care must be exercised in the choosing. It is 
no longer a question of what is good in education ; it is a 
question rather of what is best. 

Geography in its commercial, its industrial and social 
phases, may be made to appeal wonderfully to the pupil's 
interest and bring him into close touch with everyday 
experiences of life. Problems with a geographical setting 
should be substituted for isolated processes. Instead of 
abstract, arithmetical facts, problems regarding the actual 
tonnage of vessels, the quantity of turpentine, copper or 
codfish produced in a given locality, computation of the 
cost of transportation and of the turning of the raw mate- 
rial into the finished product, and consideration of the vari- 
ous mathematical processes involved, these may well 
have a place in the school work and will serve to illus- 



52 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

trate the point under discussion, that arithmetic is 
as necessary to a proper understanding of geogra- 
phy as is reading and language to an appreciation of 
number. 

One more illustration will suffice. That branch of 

school knowledge that may properly fall un- 

fcuiustriai der the head of the manua i or industrial arts 

also offers a field for adjustment. The so- 
called traditional subjects are thought subjects mainly. 
We have said, and truly, that book lessons only do not 
meet the demands of the developing child, as little ex- 
pression accompanies the learning process. There is 
ample impression ; there is slight expression. In order 
to get the most from our history or arithmetic or lan- 
guage, the motor element must come in. 

While the introduction of hand work in school has 

done much good, we have here swung as far 

Bothlmpres- . . . , , .. . 

sion and EX- to the opposite side, and while expression is 



not lackin & the thought element plays all too 
any school small a part in our manual training courses. 

Neither in work at the bench, in sewing, in 
the cooking room, in the various hand work processes, 
nor in the art subjects, is the power to make or construct 
necessarily supplemented by the power to think. This 
last is due in large measure to the fact that for the most 
part the child is not allowed to put himself into the work. 
He follows arbitrarily some set of exercises or a fixed cur- 
riculum and performs in a more or less mechanical man- 
ner a prescribed course of work, and this without par- 



THE ELEMENTARY CURRICULUM 53 

ticular reference to its fitness for his own individual 
needs. 

" You can teach a man," says Ruskin, " to draw a 
straight line and to cut one, to strike a curved line and 
to carve it, and to cut and carve any number of given 
lines with admirable speed and perfect precision, and you 
find his work perfect of its kind ; but if you ask him to 
think about any of these forms, to consider if he cannot 
find any better in his own head, he stops ; his execution 
becomes hesitating, he thinks, and, ten to one he thinks 
wrong ; ten to one he makes a mistake in the first touch 
he gives his work as a thinking being. But you have 
made a man of him for all that. He was only a ma- 
chine before, an animated tool." 

If it is true that a lesson in history is really valuable 

only when, out of the data and lists of facts, 

Thought in the pupils draw conclusions and reason from 

Industrial /-r > rr 

Processes cause to effect and from effect to cause, 
seeking an explanation of laws and princi- 
ples in the life of the day, so may we believe that in the 
manual processes the thought side must be emphasized 
by reasoning out the why, and by seeking to develop 
new or independent methods of procedure. 

May not work of a constructive nature, the industrial 
processes, properly carried on, furnish one 
of the foun dation stones of the future pri- 



Work in mary school curriculum ? Dr. Dewey says 

School 

that the curriculum should be " so selected 
and organized as to provide the material for affording 



54 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

the child a consciousness of the world in which he has 
to play a part, and the relations he has to meet."* Ac- 
cepting this, are not the media of the shop, the labora- 
tory, the studio, the garden, best suited to bring about 
the desired results ? 

In an address before the Department of Superintend- 
ence at Cincinnati, in February, 1903, President Eliot 
said : " I believe there is as much mental training in 
manual work as in any book whatsoever " ; and again, " I 
believe there is more value in manual work than in nine- 
tenths of the arithmetic in the schools." 

Teachers generally seem to be recognizing the fact 
that in no way can we so well form a school that shall 
be paralleled with, rather than angular to, the actual, 
everyday life of the child and the adult, as by adjusting 
our programs to the industrial and social forms that go 
to make up our everyday existence. 

How long shall we allow a false psychology to hamper us 
and to shape our school work a psychology 
Psychology 7 which is largely responsible for the stereo- 
typed form that hand work has taken in the 
past ? This psychology, true enough, has in a measure 
recognized the child as the most vital element to be con- 
sidered, but being based upon false assumptions, the 
practices growing out of the application of this psychol- 
ogy have left the child largely out of the educational 
equation. This so-called faculty psychology has insisted 
that the mind is cut up into divisions, each division being 

* Ethical Principles Underlying Education, p. 26. 



THE ELEMENTARY CURRICULUM 55 

devoted to a given mental faculty or process. These 
faculties or attributes of the mind are parceled out and 
labeled as memory, judgment, imagination, reason, and 
the like, each faculty being trained through the presen- 
tation and assimilation of certain study material. Not 
only is this held to be true, but more ; it is conceived 
that such habits as neatness, exactness, precision, hon- 
esty and accuracy, are developed through the perform- 
ance of certain tasks, or by engaging in various motor 
exercises. In other words, a particular faculty or habit 
is trained, not so much in a general way along with other 
tendencies, but in a special sense, by a special method, 
or through a particular medium. One conclusion to be 
drawn from this is that the student, careful, accurate 
and discriminating in his manual work, will exemplify 
these qualities in all other school departments. 

That this is not the case in its broadest conception, 
there seems little room for doubt. " Acute powers of 
observation and memory might be developed by studying 
Chinese characters. Acuteness in reasoning might be 
got by discussion of the scholastic subtleties of the Mid- 
dle Ages. The simple fact is that there is no isolated 
faculty of observation, or memory, or reasoning, any more 
than there is an original faculty of blacksmithing, car. 
pentering or steam engineering. These faculties simply 
mean that particular impulses and habits have been co- 
ordinated and framed with reference to accomplishing 
certain definite kinds of work. Precisely the same 
thing holds for the so-called mental faculties. They are 



56 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

not powers in themselves but such only with reference 
to the ends to which they are put, the services which 
they have to perform. Hence, they cannot be located 
or discussed as powers upon a theoretical, but only upon 
a practical, basis. We need to know the social situation 
with reference to which the individual will have to use 
ability to observe, recollect, imagine and reason, before 
we can get any intelligent and concrete basis for 
telling what a training of mental powers actually means, 
either in the general principles or in its working 
details." * 

To be sure a boy made careful in the shop has a ten- 
dency to be careful in the recitation room. 

Help* lntife This is one of the stron g arguments in favor 
Formation of o f manual training in the school. Since the 

Eight Habits , 

manual processes are transparent, so far as 
teacher and pupil are concerned, and since in dealing 
with them slight opportunity is offered for deception, we 
have in the arts a mighty power for good, making for 
the establishment of right habits. While certain so- 
called " faculties " may not be trained, it is perhaps true 
that the individual will here form habits of mind that 
will render him more efficient than he would other- 
wise be. 

The change in present day thought does not mini- 
mize the value of handwork. It will appeal to many 
who can be reached through no other channel. Out- 
ward form, technique, system and sequence, while hav- 

*Dewey: Ethical Principles Underlying Education, p. 13. 



THE ELEMENTARY CURRICULUM 57 

in- a legitimate place, must be subordinated to thought, 
to values, and to utility. We must realize, too, that the 
truly utilitarian is not far removed from the truly educa- 
tional, and that the essence of the one is the essential 
in the other. 

In discussing the motive and content of the curriculum, 
we shall have to consider the complexity of 
ofso P ciety y our industrial life and the deep significance 
of the industrial processes to every member 
of society. In an ever increasing ratio, we are, through 
these changes, becoming creatures of interdependence. 
The coat I wear, the bread and the fruit and the sugar 
that contributed to my last meal, the telephone that calls 
me from my task, the stove that makes it possible for me 
to warm my room, and the roof that now shelters me, 
the bicycle that conveys me to town, and the paper 
upon which is written the welcome letter I receive, are 
necessities and comforts and luxuries, and for which I 
am indebted to my fellows in this and the farthest lands 
of the sea. No longer do we supply ourselves with our 
daily needs, but through an industrial and economic reci- 
procity, each one in turn becomes, in fact, " his brother's 
keeper." 

The industrial argument is not external as might seem 
to be the case at first blush. It is dynamic, rather. Be- 
cause the nation is rapidly developing a manufacturing 
and industrial bias, it does not follow that there is only 
a passing significance here to the schools. The demand 
for changed conditions is psychologic, expressing itself 



58 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

through the commercial spirit ; it comes from within ; 
and more and more are we beginning to see that work 
to be educational must be purposeful. As Professor 
Jackman puts it, " The first demand of the mind is 
for motive." * 

It is not necessary to elaborate further. Enough has 
been said to show that in each school subject there is 
ample need of adjustment, of cutting down and of en- 
richment of the subject-matter. 

In his article, Experiments upon Children, Dr. G. Stan- 
ley Hall speaks of the present as a " metamorphic pe- 
riod " in education and then goes on to say : " A mere 
list of fads now in practice in various places would make 
a long article. Idiotic busy work in the lower grades ; 
learning to read without knowing the alphabet, so that 
occasionally children old enough to use the dictionary 
have to make up their arrears of knowledge to do so; 
blob drawing ; typewriting and shorthand in high school ; 
four foreign languages for boys and girls in the early 
teens who have almost nothing in their minds to express 
in the vernacular ; Latin and algebra in the grammar 
school ; wood and iron work in manual training courses 
that are wooden in intelligence and iron in their inflexi- 
bility ; sharply demarcated schools and theories of physi- 
cal training which will not harmonize and give the chil- 
dren the best in all ; metaphysics of the effete German 
school for kindergartners, who ought to know something 
of nursing as taught to high school graduates and to 

* Elementary School Teacher, vol. 5, p. 60. 



THE ELEMENTARY CURRICULUM 59 

know the child's body which at that age most needs 
cure ; interest in the finished product, which is used for 
show, rather than in educational values ; everywhere and 
perhaps especially in English, content and substance sub- 
ordinated to form ; method whipped up to a sillabub that 
suggests an analogy between the graduates of certain nor- 
mal schools and the mediaeval barber's apprentice, who 
could set up for himself only when he could whip two 
ounces of soap into barrels of lather ; the mechanism of 
marks and hearing lessons, instead of teaching ; the 
college dominating the high school, which is really 
the people's college, with its excessive entrance exam- 
inations ; distraction among the multiplicity of differ- 
ent topics, these are some of the dangers, of which 
some are universal, and others dominant in certain 
places." * 

While we may not subscribe to all that Dr. Hall says, 
we should at least be in accord with the spirit of his mes- 
sage. The curriculum has indeed been broadened, while 
at the same time it has not been made sufficiently deep. 
In just the same degree that school work does not furnish 
power, does not put the pupil in possession of himself, in 
just so far is it failing in its mission. 

There is one factor, however, that must not be over- 
looked in our discussion ; a factor that rises 
as a Facto^ above system, or curriculum, a factor that 
is greater than means or methods or courses 
of study : a factor without which our schools are poor 

* Good Housekeeping, vol. 37, no. 4, p. 338. 



60 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

indeed : the personality of the teacher. It is the 
teacher who must work out and frame the curricu- 
lum to suit the needs of his particular boys and girls ; 
and it is the influence of the teacher that will shape and 
mold the habits and lives of his pupils. It is the 
teacher of energy, of spirit, of will, of moral stamina and 
intensity of purpose who will impress himself upon those 
under his care. The teacher who will be content only 
with the best is the teacher we want. The story is told 
of the bugler who played the advance that sent the men 
into battle. But the commanding officer, feeling hedged 
about and doubtful of success, ordered that a retreat be 
played. " Captain," replied the bugler, " I never learned 
to play a retreat." We want no retreats, we want only 
advances. There is an ever increasing place for the 
teacher of purpose and of power ; there should be no 
place for the one. of doubt and dishonesty. 

How then shall the proper adjustment of the elemen- 
tary school curriculum be brought about ? The answer 
maybe given readily; but the actual work of adjustment 
is difficult to carry on, mainly, because, as before stated, 
the standard of the school has sprung from the belief 
that knowledge is power. Not until men are sufficiently 
broad-minded to realize that the life of the present, so 
different from that of their own early days, so much 
more intricate and complex than was that of our fathers, 
demands a new interpretation ; not until they see clearly 
that "new times demand new measures and new men," 
and are able to apply the life standards to the processes 



/ ///-; ]<IJ-:.\IENTARY CURRICULUM 6l 

of the six-hour school day ; not until they can give rea- 
son based upon common sense for such practices, shall 
we be able to see how the curriculum is to be adjusted 
and shall we be active in accomplishing this adjustment. 

"The works of God are all for naught, 

Unless our eyes in seeing, 
See underneath the thing, the thought 
That animates its being." 

We shall see to it then, in shaping our curriculum, 
that abstract principle be thrown into the background, 
and that live, vital issues, those more in accord with the 
Zcit Geist the spirit of the age, be in evidence. Con- 
tent must be substituted for form, and the real must take 
the place of the symbol, the thing done rather than the 
thing said, must stand ; the deed, the act, the accom- 
plishment, not mere feeling or emotion, must hold sway. 
No longer can the school be considered as a thing of and 
by itself. It must rise or fall as a part of the great so- 
cial life of the child's existence. In the institutional life 
of the day, the school is recognized as one of the instru- 
ments through which expression manifests itself. It is a 
link in the chain made by the home, the school, the 
church, the state, the outside world. The school can no 
longer be regarded as a separate element, an existence, 
per sc, where the child is to receive instruction that he 
may later live. He must live at school as he should live 
at home, or on the street, or in the shop, or at the forge. 
He must step from the school into the work of life, 
whereas now, preparation for his life's work must be 



62 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

made after leaving the superficial atmosphere of the 
school. 

I have tried to show the necessity of shaping the cur- 
riculum of the elementary school to meet the demands 
of the progressive spirit of our day, and I have endeav- 
ored to indicate certain points at which adjustment 
should be made and to suggest how the changes may be 
brought about; for the curriculum must be developed 
from within, not built up from without ; it must be fitted 
to the child, not the child fitted to it. 

I would not be understood as saying that every ele- 
ment in our present day courses should be stricken out. 
Indeed, I have attempted to show that many times the 
older, more conservative thought, stands superior to a 
modern whim or tendency. We shall find the truth of 
Disraeli's saying that "It is easier to criticise than to 
correct." And we must remember that "the letter 
killeth, the spirit giveth life." 

Three points, it seems to me, have been determined, 
looking toward the betterment of the elementary school 
curriculum. First, the arrangement of the courses of 
study must be such as to fit the needs and conditions of 
the individual student : in other words, the work given 
shall have some reference to the pupil's capacity and to 
his life after leaving school. Second, there must be a 
rational coming together of home, school and outside 
world, so that the child may see the necessity for and ap- 
preciate the underlying principles animating the whole. 
Third % teachers must come to their work not only pre- 



THE ELEMENTARY CURRICULUM 63 

pared as to subject-matter, but possessing enthusiasm, 
sympathy, high ideals, and the ability to obtain the co- 
ition of parents and patrons. 

Finally, is it not easy to see that we have been making, 
through our primary school curricula, a different sort of 
life in the schoolroom from that actually existing outside 
of it ; a life not at all real and certainly not ideal ? The 
lack of interest has been mainly on account of this. So 
different is the atmosphere of the school from that of 
real life that the pupil does not recognize the school ele- 
ments as having vital bearing or application outside the 
school. In the school he works for show, for standing, 
and while ready with the facts, loses or never finds their 
true meaning or application. 

With a program that shall fit the child's needs will 
come an increased desire to continue in school, a live in- 
terest in its many problems, an increased student attitude. 
Then, too, will the child see more clearly his relations to 
his fellows, his individual duties and responsibilities, and 
while recognizing his own worth, will at the same time 
appreciate the meaning and significance of the commu- 
nity, the society, the social whole of which he is only one 
of the units. 

THESES 

1 . An unrest in educational matters is apparent, which, 
beginning in the secondary school, now shows clearly in 
the school of elementary grade. 

2. There is general agreement upon underlying educa- 



64 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

tional principles, but little unity in application of the 
same. 

3. The school is planned to meet the needs of the few; 
school courses should appeal to the mass. 

4. Since past and present standards in education differ, 
and since the school must be in harmony with the real 
life of the individual, adjustment in school courses must 
be made all along the line and in all subjects. 

5. In too great a degree the elementary school is domi- 
nated by the institutions of secondary grade. 

6. Arithmetic, Language, Geography and Industrial 
Arts are used as illustrations of the necessity for adjust- 
ment throughout the school. 

7. As so-called thought subjects in the past contained 
little of the expressive element, so the present work in 
industrial lines touches too lightly the thought side. 

8. Constructive work built upon a sane foundation is 
invaluable. The best in both the early and present day 
education is necessary to a proper adjustment of the 
curriculum, that the pupil may find his place in society. 

9. The personality of the teacher is, in the last analy- 
sis, the main factor to be considered. 

TOPICS FOR STUDY 

1. What is the meaning of a socialized curriculum ? 

2. Is further unity in school subjects desirable? Con- 
sider the question as to whether we can have unity with- 
out uniformity. 

3. The elementary school as a social center. 



THE ELEMENTARY CURRICULUM 65 

4. The elementary school as a neighborhood or com- 
munity center. 

5. What part should imitation play in the work of the 
various grades? Originality? Are imitation and origi- 
nality antagonistic elements, or is one the foundation of 
the other? 

6. Consider fully as to whether the school, as a 
community, finds its standards in the individual or in 
society. Does the mass or the reformer mold public 
opinion ? 

7. Are school hours too long ? Why should the school 
year not extend over the full twelve months? 

8. Are school duties too absorbing? 

9. The average recitation time in the elementary school 
is increasing. Discuss the advantages of increasing the 
time of recitation, and of the study period. 

10. Outside preparation for elementary pupils. 

1 1 . To what extent should the teacher assume care of 
pupils after school hours or at such times as the school 
is not in session ? 

1 2. Management of games and sports by the teacher. 

13. Show to what extent the school makes for and 
suppresses leadership. 

14. Consider the relation of the pupil, the parent and 
the teacher in the actual making of the course of study. 

15. The statement is made frequently that the envi- 
ronment must be considered when constructing the 
course of study. Show how this is true, and discuss 
the relation of environment to curriculum. 

Standards 5 



66 



STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 



1 6. Should there be a closer union between the ele- 
mentary and the secondary school ? Study the problem 
of a closer articulation of school courses. 

17. Make a list of all topics in arithmetic that could 
well be dropped. Do the same for each of the other 
subjects. What could be done in the time that is 
gained by such elimination ? 

1 8. Show whether the subject, the method, or the 
teacher, is the matter of chief importance. What part 
does the text-book and administration play? Is your 
answer the same in all cases ? 



CONSULT 

BALDWIN Industrial Social Education. 

BRYAN The Basis of Practical Teaching. 

BUTLER The Meaning of Education. 

DEWEY My Educational Creed. 

Psychology and Social Practice, Psychologi- 
cal Review, vol. 7, no. 2. 
Psychological Aspects of the School Curricu- 
lum, Educational Review, April, 1897, vol. 

*3> PP- 35 6 -369. 
The Child and the Curriculum. 
The School and Society. 
Ethical Principles Underlying Education. 
DOPP The Place of Industries in Elementary 

Education. 

BUTTON, The Curriculum of the Elementary School, 

PEARSON, AND in Teachers College Record, vol. 5, 
RICHARDS no. 2. 



Till-. ELEMENTARY CURRICULUM 



67 



ELIOT Educational Reform, chaps. 7, 8, n; see 

also addresses in proceedings of Cincin- 
nati meeting of the Department of Super- 
intendence, 1903. 

FROEBEL Education of Man. 

GORDY A Broader Elementary Education. 

HALL Experiments upon Children, in Good House- 

keeping, Oct., 1903. 

HANUS Attempted Improvements in the Course of 

Study, in Educational Review, Dec., 1896, 
vol. 12, pp. 435-452. 

HARRIS Psychological Foundations of Education. 

The Correlation of Studies, Report of Com- 
mittee of Fifteen on Elementary Educa- 
tion. 

HENDERSON A New Program in Education. 
Education and the Larger Life. 

McMuRRY, C. Elements of General Method. 

McMuRRY The Curriculum of the Speyer School, in 

AND BURKS Teachers College Record, vol. 4, no. i. 

O'SHEA Education as Adjustment. 

PARKER Talks on Pedagogics. 

PAYNE Public Elementary School Curricula. 

SADLER The Unrest in Secondary Education. 

SPENCER Education. 

WILSON Pedagogues and Parents. 



CHAPTER III 
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING: ITS AIM AND SCOPE 

IT is because that branch of school knowledge usually 
spoken of as industrial training is being so generally in- 
troduced into our courses of study and because so few 
parents or teachers, aside from the specialist, claim ade- 
quate acquaintance with its deeper educational value, 
that the subject is here considered. From their compara- 
tively new position as special subjects, given in a few 
localities only, manual training, domestic science and 
other industrial processes are becoming so general through- 
out certain districts that patrons and educational folk 
the country over are discussing their many phases; and the 
regular grade teacher is being forced to the consideration 
of problems of method, of material, and of forms of work. 

Some years ago I was asked by one of our leading school 
men why I advocated the introduction of manual train- 
ing into the curriculum. Said he, "I have repeatedly 
asked teachers of manual training this question and have 
received no satisfactory reply to my query. They suggest 
always some impossible result to be accomplished or 
some vague form of development to be reached. What 
then," he insisted, "is the educational value of the sub- 
ject?" My reply was that should he give me his reasons 

68 



INDUSTRIAL TRAINING 69 

for advocating history and science as school subjects, I 
would probably in like terms return him the answer he 
drsiivd. Laying aside the consideration of relative values, 
the same principles underlie the one that are at the base 
of the other. It is safe to say that many are now willing 
to accept this view of the matter. 

To speak of the development, during the past three 
decades, of any school subject, is obviously a task of no 
mean proportions. Even the traditional studies of the 
curriculum, reading, grammar, history, mathematics, have 
undergone radical change and modification, though in 
their foundations they have been more or less fixed for a 
considerable length of time. Using geography as a type 
of this change, we find the content and method, in many 
quarters at least, almost totally different from that of a 
few years past. While hand work is a comparatively new 
subject and need not be considered as existing, for school 
purposes at least, prior to thirty years ago, the more 
modern and generally accepted practices in this field have 
little in common with those of the earlier date, or of 
twenty or of even a half score years past. To what are 
these changes due and what is their significance in the 
educational life of the day ? 

It will not be necessary to consider at length the history 

of the manual training movement, or to trace 

totheintro- m detail i ts growth to the present time. 

Handwork ^^ s ^ as k een ^ one a & am an< ^ again, and 

has, perhaps, been necessary to make clear 

the educational demands for hand work. Discussions 



70 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

have been brought forward and arguments made upon 
the principles underlying the manual occupations; the 
psychological point of view has been exploited; the growth 
of brain areas and brain tracts resulting from action of 
motor centers has been dwelt upon; the threefold de- 
velopment of the individual, that of the mental, moral 
and physical natures has been declared impossible with- 
out the aid of manual training; education of a so-called 
all around character, of head, hand and heart, has had 
able advocates. But while these ideas have been put 
forward in perfectly good faith and while certain of the 
principles involved are considered sound at the present 
day, it is nevertheless true that delightful theory and vain 
imaginings have prompted many of them and upon these 
have been constructed courses of study that cannot last 
or that have entirely passed away. 

Manual training, hand work, motor activity, construct- 
ive work, industrial education : these are some 
The Name o f the terms suggested to indicate the work 
Purpose proposed to satisfy the creative tendency in 

the individual. The term manual training 
is the one most commonly in use, but it is now being ar- 
gued by many that it does not convey fully, nor correctly, 
the idea or significance of the processes in question. 
Manual training implies training of a manual nature 
only; and at the present time, this is but one of the ob- 
jects to be sought through industrial processes. Hence, 
the suggestion of the term, manual or industrial arts. 

Of the various reasons advanced for the introduction 



INDUSTRIAL TRAINING 71 

of hand work into the curriculum, the following may be 
taken as being of chief importance. It must not be sup- 
posed that any individual advocate would advance all 
of the several reasons here given, because the particular 
exponent generally has in mind a specific purpose which 
he hopes to see realized through the introduction of the 
hand work processes. 

First. Manual training, properly directed and carried 
on, will create in the mind of the individual a love for 
work, and an appreciation of the dignity of honest labor, 
such as can be had in no other way. 

Second. The natural activity of the pupil, an activity 
that is native and that must find expression, is given freer 
play in the hand work processes than elsewhere in school. 

Third. The industrial side of our work-a-day existence, 
calling to us as it does from every hand, gains an added 
clearness in the minds of those boys and girls who engage 
in manual work in school. 

Fourth. The immature mind of the pupil demands rest 
and recreation from the continuous application to book 
studies. The introduction of hand work relieves the ten- 
sion and returns the pupil to his other tasks, quickened 
and refreshed in body and mind. 

Fijth. The physical development of the pupil is pro- 
moted by doing such work as calls for bodily strength 
and action. He stands rather than sits and is enabled to 
assume healthful positions. 

Sixth. The subject being rather concrete than other- 
wise, and something in which deception cannot readily 



72 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

find a place, the moral standards of the pupil are raised. 
Any defect is readily observed by both pupil and teacher, 
the transparency of the work making it comparatively 
difficult for sham to be substituted for honest endeavor. 

Seventh. Those who pursue work of a constructive na- 
ture are likely to possess a general dexterity or handi- 
ness, a deftness of hand in execution. The dexterity or 
ability to use one's hands, to handle materials and master 
tools is to be considered from the educative side only. 
In this connection it is not thought of as reaching over 
into the field of bread-winning. 

Eighth. Work in the manual training room, of what- 
ever nature it may be or whatever form it may assume, 
will lay the foundation of a trade that may finally be 
carried to a more complete development. 

Ninth. Since the concrete and the objective appeal to 
the untrained mind, as the abstract, abstruse conception 
cannot, the books or traditional subjects are made clear 
where reenforced by the more tangible productions of the 
manual training room. 

Let us examine each of these several propositions in 
turn and endeavor to discover the strength in each. 

The necessity for a tolerant spirit on the part of those 
who do not engage in physical labor toward 
tnose whose support comes through toil and 
struggle, is increasingly evident. In these 
days of strife between capital and labor, of combination 
of money and union of men, of industrial competition and 
narrow margins, the dignity of hand labor should be ap- 



INDUSTRIAL TRAINING 73 

predated by every thinking man and woman. According 
to the last census of the United States, the number of those 
following some gainful occupation was something over 
twenty-nine millions, of which in round numbers, thirty- 
hve per cent were engaged in agriculture, twenty-four per 
cent in mechanical and manufacturing lines, nineteen per 
cent in domestic and personal service, sixteen per cent in 
trade and transportation, and four per cent in professional 
pursuits. It will thus be seen that much of the work ac- 
complished is carried on through the physical energies 
of our people. 

Those who have examined this question most closely, 
affirm that in schools where manual training work is 
carried on, the sons of the wealthy and the sons of the 
poor stand side by side at the bench or the forge. The 
dust of labor covers each alike. The same problems con- 
front one as do the other; and each in turn has these prob- 
lems to work out and solve. They sympathize, one with 
the other, in disappointments and failures; and each re- 
joices with his fellow when success attends him. They 
touch elbows, and there grows up between them a kin- 
ship that poverty upon the one hand and wealth upon the 
other cannot dispel. There can be no doubt, that, more 
and more, these conditions are being realized, and that 
people from all walks of life are being advantaged thereby. 

All present day education insists upon the necessity for 
activity on the part of the child. The philosophy of Plato, 
the theories of Pestalozxzi, and the utterances of Froebel 
cried out for something in school work that should 



74 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

keep the child free and active and allow him to expand 
and grow in a normal manner. The ne- 
The DC- cessity for activity in development has, in- 

Activity 01 deed, been appreciated and understood since 
early times. The developing mind is an active 
mind. The immature body is a growing body. Building, 
making, creating, destroying, these are inherent traits in 
the child and are recognized by the exponents of any ra- 
tional educational plan. Says Colonel Francis W. Parker, 
when speaking of manual training as being one of the 
many modes of expression: "Making, or manual training, 
has done more for the human race than the exercise of any 
if not all, of the other modes of expression. It is abso- 
lutely indispensable to normal, physical development; it 
has had a mighty influence upon brain building." * 

In doors and out, at school or at home, the normal 
child expresses himself in terms of movement, of activity. 
The industrial arts will bring to the child through the 
various media, opportunity for such activity. 

The complexity and the deep significance of the in- 
dustrial processes to every member of so- 
ciety are considerations worthy our attention. 



The industrial spirit of the day continually 
demands translation and interpretation at the hands of 
the child. The "what is it?" and "why?" form of ques- 
tion is ever being put. Contact with the materials of 
the manual training room, a study of the raw products, 
and participation in the various processes will assist 

* Talks on Pedagogics, p. 253. 



INDUSTRIAL TRAINING 75 

toward a more complete understanding of our industrial 
life. 

"An education which cultivates the industrial spirit is 
the best education the school can give; it is the only all 
round education; it is the only human education; it is the 
only education based on the self activity of the pupil and 
is therefore the only education which will satisfy the de- 
mands of our day and generation; potent beyond any- 
thing we have yet tried, it diminishes pauperism and 
crime, which are increasing out of all proportion to the 
growth of population, in spite of our present methods of 
training." * 

It is then, perhaps not too much to say that contact 
with the actual materials of the shop and the laboratory, 
the kitchen and the garden, will awaken the individual 
to a consciousness of the value and significance of the 
many industrial phases that touch him en every side and 
help to shape his very existence. 

No parent or teacher, no one who has studied child 

nature, but knows how impossible it is for 

TheNeces- the mind to hold itself to any set task for 

sityfor . * 

change more than a short time. To realize this 

difficulty, let the adult, the reader, indeed, 
endeavor to hold himself to the consideration of a given 
topic to the exclusion of all else. Only as the mind is 
concentrated upon the subject in hand, only as the at- 
tention is directed toward the desired end is the particular 

*W. S. Mack, 26th Anmtal Report, Moline, 111., Public Schools, 1899, 
P-33- 



76 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

lesson or task truly considered. After a short period of 
such attention, the mind will wander and adjust itself to 
other things, returning, perhaps, to take up again the 
desired problem. This means that as much may be ac- 
complished in a short period with concentrated effort, as 
by endeavoring to hold the mind for prolonged reaches 
of time, only to find the attention wandering and desultory 
and the ideas vague. Change, with the mind as with the 
body, is rest; and if the pupil, when wearied, can take 
up some manual occupation he will return later to his 
books, fresh and ready to engage again in the more purely 
mental processes. 

Says Dr. Albert Shaw: "Seek in every subject of study, 
especially in the lower grades, to provide motor activity, 
at least as an accompaniment of study and recitation. If 
possible, however, invent means which shall use up the 
motor tendencies and at the same time make a contribut- 
ing part of the more purely thought work required of the 
child. In short, let some doing accompany all the child's 
efforts to learn." 

In schools where such forms of work are provided, 
that the pupil may readily change from the one to the 
other, much improvement has been found. The pupil 
looks forward to his manual work with pleasure, and 
attacks with vigor and energy the problems of his daily 
recitations. 

There can be no question of the desirability of the 
strong body. The time has long since passed when to be 
a student means to be an invalid and a weakling. The 



INDUSTRIAL TRAINING 77 

pair student of the monastery with his book for com- 
panion is no longer the symbol for educa- 
tion - Jt is > perhaps, the duty of the school 
to make for physical and bodily growth, fully 
as much as it is to minister to the mental side of the pupil's 
nature. Many schoolrooms are admirably suited to pre- 
vent physical growth. In a close fitting seat, leaning over 
upon a desk several sizes too small, or reaching up to one 
as much too large, with shoulders stooped and chest com- 
pressed, many a boy and girl is, through the long hours 
of the day, assuming harmful and dangerous bodily 
positions. Instead of being free and unhampered, pupils 
are many times cramped and warped. 

Muscular action and exercise of the larger organs of 
movement are provided for in any rational form of the 
industrial arts. If the child sits, he may usually be in a 
healthful position; if he stands or walks about, his move- 
ments are free. He works with materials that offer re- 
sistance to his efforts and with tools that demand strength 
in their mastery. The effects of certain necessary harmful 
bodily attitudes are counteracted and undeveloped muscles 
are strengthened. 

The more concrete the work in hand, the less likely is 

doubt and uncertainty to play a part. In 

grammar or history, a mistake upon the 

cult pupil's part may easily pass unchallenged. 

The student glides over an error consciously 

or without intent; and even the teacher may not detect 

the fault. In a word, both teacher and pupil may be de- 



78 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

ceived. In the shop or in the cooking room it is quite 
different. Be the box too long or too short, the metal too 
thick or too thin, the joint too loose, the basket askew, 
the stitches uneven, or the ingredients improper in pro- 
portion, little doubt need enter the pupil's mind as to 
the Tightness of his work. He can see and have pointed 
out to him the fault or defect, and can himself usually 
tell when the same is remedied. 

How often do we find the pupil in his book lesson, be- 
lieving thoroughly that he understands the subject, when 
later it becomes apparent that he does not! Simply re- 
peating something, memorizing a statement, or working 
through an abstract problem, does not prove that there is 
an understanding of the same. 

There has been no lack of manual training advocates, 
especially among the parents themselves, to 
Dexterity P ut forward the claims for a general dex- 
terity of hand. Work of a constructive na- 
ture, when taken up by the boy in school, will, they affirm, 
render him handy at making and repairing things, and 
these people will tell you that this is the chief benefit to 
be derived from a study of the manual arts. Certain it is 
that many friends of manual training consider the ability 
to use a knowledge gained, toward useful and purposeful 
ends, a desideratum. As a rule, however, they do not 
think in terms of its industrial, or economic, or commercial 
value, but rather in terms of its so-called educational 
worth. In other words, while desiring that industrial 
work be directed in useful channels, they look upon it in 



INDUSTRIAL TRAINING 79 

the light of an added tool that will assist in further de- 
velopment, rather than as a factor bringing immediate 
results. 

A sharp line is drawn by most advocates between the 
teaching of the industrial arts for the pur- 
P se f learning a trade upon the one hand, 
and for what is spoken of as the purely forma- 
tive side, upon the other; there have all along been those 
who have ably put forward the idea that hand work in 
schools should not only aim at, but should prepare di- 
rectly for, some one of the many trades in which the pupil 
might engage. Many persons, a majority no doubt, do 
not discriminate between manual training for general 
purposes and the work carried on in the regular trade 
school; and since the elements of so many trades are of 
necessity found to exist in the work done in the various 
school shops, the chief value attaching to hand work is 
conceived to be in furnishing the foundations for some one 
or more of these several trades. 

That the province of the real trade school is distinct 
from the field of the manual arts in the regular school, 
and that the two must not be confused, need not be con- 
sidered at length here. Since, however, to earn one's 
livelihood is quite legitimate, rather than degrading, and 
since the making of things without the application of 
knowledge gained is no longer thought of as being edu- 
cational, the trade and educational phases are, in the 
last analysis, not in conflict. True it is that the boy or the 
girl, having intelligently pursued work in manual train- 



8o STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

ing, is enabled to take up and carry forward not only the 
plans worked out by others, but is capable of originating 
problems. His ability in self-expression and his power 
of individual initiative is quickened. 

The writer was told recently by the manager of a large 
furniture factory, that the most difficult undertaking con- 
nected with his business was the securing of efficient men 
to plan and direct new enterprises; that more than else- 
where, in the graduates of the manual training high school, 
were they finding the men they desired. I could give so 
many instances hi line with the above that individual cases 
would lose their worth. 

Objective teaching in the school has long been looked 

upon as being of extreme value. In the man- 

Teacidn ua ^ training the pupil approaches more nearly 



clarifies the tangible product than elsewhere in school 

Mental 

Concepts work. When the industrial processes are 
used, not so much as an end in themselves, 
nor merely from the standpoint of a school subject, but 
as a medium of expression, the other subjects are illumi- 
nated. The shadows are thrown into relief, so to speak. 
It is claimed that the problem in mathematics or the ex- 
periment in science, which heretofore has proved only so 
many words to the pupil, is readily understood when the 
model or bit of apparatus made by the student, is used 
for illustration. 

When carried to its final analysis, this point brings one 
to the idea of the correlation of manual processes with 
other school work. Some declare that when thus con- 



INDUSTRIAL TRAINING 81 

, manual training will be the " handmaid" of the 
other subjects and will thus become degraded. Those 
who hold this view are, of course, making the subject, 
rather than the child, the object of chief concern. Any 
rational unifying of subjects can result only in benefit to 
all. 

With this brief consideration of the more important 
claims made for the introduction of hand work into the 
school, we may now turn to a somewhat general discus- 
sion of the field of the industrial arts. 

The so-called exercise system of manual training is 
that first put into actual practice in Russia 

system 6 1 * 6 ^^ * s s P^ en ^ usually as the Russian 
system. It is very probably true that work 
of the nature indicated was actually begun in France. 
The exercise system, worked out largely in the secondary 
and technical schools, and at a date earlier than the in- 
troduction of hand work into the grades, comprised as the 
term implies, a series of abstract exercises. Using wood 
as the material to illustrate the thought, certain typical 
tool processes would be considered, such as cross or rip- 
sawing, chiseling, the construction of various joints, and 
so on. In sewing, to illustrate further, various stitches 
were practised upon a bit of fabric prepared for such 
work; buttonholes were made and buttons fastened, 
sample pieces of cloth being used. Later on in the course, 
indeed, these abstract exercises frequently found ex- 
pression in a completed article. 
These exercises, whether in wood, iron, cloth or other 

Standards 6 



82 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

material, were based upon supposed difficulty in tool 
manipulation, the simple movements being followed in 
regular order by the more difficult. Under this system, as 
a general rule, and in most places, the exercises or articles 
made became the property of the school, to be disposed 
of as desired. 

Teaching was carried on in the mass, little use being 
made of the individual form of instruction. The ex- 
ercises, too, were given in direct order and in some in- 
stances, as pertains in certain Danish schools to-day, the 
class worked as a unit, until someone dropped behind or 
forged ahead of his fellows, when the class would pause 
that all might again start at a given signal and proceed 
in harmony as before. 

The exercise system, under which the abstract task was 
performed, was the forerunner of the model 
system* 6 system, which comprehended the making of 
complete objects. This in itself was a long 
step forward, the models being thought of as articles of 
use. What is known as the Swedish Sloyd or Slojd em- 
phasizes more clearly than anything else this model 
scheme of hand work. Again taking wood as the illus- 
trative material, although at first paper, rushes, iron and 
other materials were used, a number of objects were pre- 
sented, carefully arranged and graded as to difficulty of 
construction, considered chiefly with reference to tool 
manipulation. It was therefore necessary to determine 
what tool, or what particular exercise with a given tool, 
presented the least difficulty. As before stated, this same 



INDUSTRIAL TRAINING 83 

principle was applied to other forms of hand work; sew- 
ing, for example, to use the illustration before given. 
In this manner the pupil was carried along by regular 
steps, from the simple to the complex, from the known to 
the unknown, from the concrete to the abstract. 

Here, as under the exercise system, the sequence was 
arranged mainly upon the basis of difficulty in tool ma- 
nipulation, without consideration of necessity or choice, or 
varying ability in the pupils. The models were made in 
both rectilinear and curvilinear form to be tested not 
only with measuring tools, but also with the eye and sense 
of touch. They became the property of the student by 
whom they were constructed. 

While those advocating such a scheme as is here men- 
tioned, realized that the abstract would not 
what is satisfy, they failed many times to under- 

stand that the model could be nearly or quite 
as far removed from the concrete as the exercise itself. 
Here again, as under the exercise system, the thing is 
made because it is the next object in the series or course, 
and not necessarily because any particular need or desire 
on the part of the child calls for the making of such an 
object. No demand may arise from the pupil himself 
for a flower stick or a keyboard, a hammock or an apron. 
He makes the board or stick, in some instances putting 
it to use or perhaps giving it away; frequently it is left at 
school, or if carried home it is stored in the attic or laid 
aside in the bureau drawer to be exhibited to visitors. 

We cannot write the history of the past by writing 



84 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

simply the history of the savage in the jungle. We can 
write the history of the past only by coming from the past 
into the present, by tracing the development of past acts 
into present achievement and present needs. So, too, 
with education. It is not enough to stop with the past, 
to trace certain culture epochs, and to do primitive things 
in a primitive fashion. The school life and the later life 
of the pupil as well, must be consulted and the work laid 
in accordance with life's demands, consistent, of course, 
with the best development of the child. 
Tradition and habit are stubborn enemies if misdi- 
rected. Says the author of a recent bit of 
SStaSed fiction: "^ is wonderful what a fund of use- 
less information some people assimilate and 
cling to with persistent determination worthy of a better 
cause." This might well furnish the text for what I 
shall say regarding the industrial phases of the subject. 
It is not an extravagant statement to make, that many 
of the principles supposed to be at the foundation of our 
manual courses, principles borrowed in a sense from 
the Swedes, the Russians, or the French, have never been 
considered by them as being principles at all. Or to 
put it another way, while with Europeans, from whom 
certain of our ideas in manual training were originally bor- 
rowed, the application of the principles has been chang- 
ing, we have kept too closely to traditional lines. More- 
over, many of the ideas put forward by these people in 
years past, as fundamental, have been discarded for 
more rational ones, while we who copy from our neigh- 



INDUSTRIAL TRAINING 85 

bors have not informed ourselves of their advance and 
still continue to worship the old. 

As an example of this, take the course of study idea as 
exemplified in the sloyd, of which we have been speaking. 
Sloyd has in many places fallen into disrepute. To make 
plant labels and flower sticks and hammer handles is not, 
say some, necessarily educational or industrial. It is, 
to be sure, manual, and tradition forces many to adhere 
to the practices of course work. Many of those who sup- 
pose they are following the principles as laid down by 
Dr. Salomon himself, the original exponent of the sloyd 
system, are as far from the reality as they could well be; 
and many others, perhaps the larger number of manual 
training teachers in our own country to-day, are una- 
ware that Salomon did not, in his later years for his own 
country even, advocate the same principles and methods 
to which he adhered in an earlier day. Could he see the 
work as carried on by many who insist they are teaching 
sloyd, he would cry out against the practices as being 
narrow and mean and spiritless. 

Most of those, too, who have abandoned the term sloyd 
and attached another horse to their cart, will, if they 
analyze fully their work, find it is as far from the indus- 
trial and the actual as is the product of the old school. I 
know school men of broad education, open minded and 
scholarly, who still refuse to believe that the manual 
training of to-day has a place of importance in the school. 
For these men I have no word of criticism. They are, I 
fear, in a measure, justified in their attitude, their belief 



86 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

being based upon their knowledge of manual training 
as they see it in the cities and towns with which they are 
familiar. What they have seen is work in one or another 
material, articles produced by certain tool manipula- 
tions articles supposed, indeed, to be of actual use. 
The results, however, even though of superior technical 
quality and produced under the guidance of a teacher of 
mechanical attainments, are not educational. They do 
not touch deeply and thoroughly the interests and needs 
and environment of the people. They have to do, not 
with life, but with lessons. 

This matter of the real as opposed to the artificial in 

manual training was brought home to me 

Real vs. most forcibly in two ways at the St. Louis 

Artificial 

exposition. It was remarkable that while in 
high school work some little attention was given to what 
might be considered the thought processes, in almost every 
elementary school course shown, a traditional sameness 
was apparent, the flower sticks and the plant labels being 
always in evidence. What a welcome change, however, 
when one visited the exhibits from the country of the mar- 
velous little Filipino. Those who saw this exhibit will 
recall what a vast array of native hand work was shown, 
rugs, baskets, articles of furniture, utensils for house- 
hold use, tools, decorative materials, these and a host 
of other things were exhibited, all work calling for con- 
structive ability and appreciation of design. It was with 
a feeling of delight that I observed some of the specimens 
of handicraft of the children of these islands, so useful, so 



INDUSTRIAL TRAINING 87 

beautiful, and made from the materials with which the 
makers were surrounded. As I examined these products, 
a young man, an American teacher in the Islands, asked 
if he might show me the best work in manual training 
done by the school children, something that would 
point clearly to the fact that they were being educated. 
I was dragged to a sacred part of the exhibit and shown 
a glass case, with a "Do not handle" sign, containing 
some of the most uselessly useful objects, from the stand- 
point of the makers, that could be conceived. There were 
bits of cloth with sample stitches, pin bowls, flower sticks 
again, corner shelves for bric-a-brac and more of like char- 
acter made of wood (much of it being American wood) by 
American tools, under American teachers, and containing 
elements neither of utility nor beauty. 

I left the exhibit more saddened than disgusted. In- 
stead of directing the native abilities and natural artistic 
tendencies along channels making for thought and power 
and for advancement mentally, commercially and in- 
dustrially, we are trying to cast them in a mold that has 
been fashioned to fit a race decades in advance, and, 
withal, a mold that is man made and too often, from 
the standpoint of utility and beauty, defective. 

This incident I have used as an illustration. Have I 
made the case too strong? I am simply putting the mat- 
ter at its utmost point to illustrate more clearly the great 
principle under discussion. There are many intermediate 
stations, I grant you; but those who are familiar only 
with the work in their immediate neighborhood or in a 



88 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

particular school, would marvel at some of the wonders 
to be seen in the educational world. It is remarkable 
how slight consideration is given locality and environ- 
ment in the make-up of a course of study. How much 
more important that the child in any given locality should 
learn to make the best possible use of the materials which 
nature has provided at hand than that he should deal with 
the product of the distant place and follow the work laid 
down for his foreign brother, in order that at a given 
moment every pupil in the universe may be working upon 
exactly the same thing. Even though the plea of utility 
may sometimes be made, one usually finds that little 
mental energy in construction is demanded. 

Let us have a real, live, industrial form of work in this 
day when the topic which overshadows in public interest 
is "the industrial and commercial development of this 
country, and the training which should be given our youth in 
the public schools, colleges, universities, and special schools 
to best fit them for the changing conditions which the twen- 
tieth century is bringing to them." * This is a wholesome 
sentiment and is in accord with what has already been said. 

There remains, however, one side of the question of 
industrial education yet to be emphasized, 

Ible^or U Gi"rl8 that f hand WOrk f r S irls ' Moi>e and mOI>e 

attention is being given such work in the 
schools, but too frequently it is from the sentimental stand- 
point. The boys have manual training, consequently we 
must provide some work with which the girls may occupy 

* Convocation Council, State of New York, 1905. 



INDUSTRIAL TRAINING 89 

tlu-ir time during such periods. Such an argument is no 
argument at all. 

The time has passed when any thinking man or woman 
will advocate the same kind or type of work for boys and 
girls alike. In the early grades all may engage in similar 
occupations, but differentiation should not be long de- 
layed and work suitable to the aptitudes, desires and needs 
of girls should be offered and required. 

At present, aside from art training and physical cul- 
ture, no industrial work is given the girls save sewing and 
cooking, and these in the upper grammar grades and a 
few special high schools. It is unnecessary to enter here 
into a discussion as to why these arts cannot or are not 
taught in the home. Such economic and sociological 
questions are involved as seem to be a barrier to home 
teaching, although the value of home instruction is un- 
questioned. Continuous courses through the grades, the 
high school and the college should be offered. Not only 
sewing and cooking in the narrower aspects, but a study 
of the chemistry of foods, simple analysis, marketing in 
its economic aspects; house sanitation, plumbing, heat, 
light, ventilation, fuel, disinfectants; proper methods of 
sweeping, dusting, laundering and care of the home; 
hygiene, emergency aid and nursing; a knowledge of ac- 
counts and business forms, domestic architecture and 
planning of the house and grounds; gardening and tree 
and floral culture and much more that in the Swiss schools 
is included under the term " female hand work" and 
which is both practical and cultural. 



90 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

Teachers have in the past held tenaciously to the idea 

that accuracy and precision in execution are 

Accuracy the paramount issues. This thought has had 

Rather than *_ . . 

Thought much influence in shaping the courses in 

hand work. Exercises have been arranged 
chiefly to meet this demand. The exercises, carefully 
thought out, have been based upon principles that seem 
fixed. We have failed to see, however, that while a prin- 
ciple may be unchanging, the applications will be chang- 
ing constantly when the developing, growing, expanding 
mind of the child is in question. There are planned elab- 
orate schemes of models and accurately arranged sequences 
of manipulations, attempting to fit the demands of the boy 
or girl to these exercises, rather than following the reverse 
order, that of fitting the occupation to the individual boy 
or girl. 

In this manner certain set forms, progressive sequences, 
particular materials have somehow been considered by 
teachers, supervisors, and superintendents as the sine qua 
non in hand work. Systems rather than system, methods 
instead of method, have been the thought before us. 
Since a somewhat broader and more rational view has be- 
gun to animate most of our other school work, the same 
spirit is being applied in our manual training courses. 

Technique ? Yes. The value of technique, of accuracy, 
Technique * P ro ^ ucm g something exact in every de- 
tail is unquestioned. To me there is some- 
thing grand, almost humanly moral, in a piece of work 
perfect in construction. But is technique the end and aim 



INDUSTRIAL TRAINING 91 

of a course in manual training or in any other school sub- 
ject? Is it the end of life? "Seek yc first the Kingdom 
of God." I see greater technique in the petals of a 
flower, no two of which are counterparts in size, form 
or color, than in twenty-seven match brackets, each 
made from one-fourth inch stock, the backs regular 
in outline and of exact and unchanging dimensions. 
Is there no technique in the coloring of the birds; and 
are they all alike? Must we have uniformity to get 
technique, even though there are no two Japanese prints 
exactly similar? Let us have technique, but if it must 
be gained at the expense of producing pupils with in- 
dividuality gone, with independence dwarfed and power 
of leadership undeveloped, then bury technique and look 
for soul. 

But, you say, individuality later. The child must not 
be allowed to choose at first. He must learn his alphabet, 
his multiplication table, his notes in music, and thus lay 
the foundation. Technique and the tools of knowledge 
must be had in the beginning. Whatever grain of truth 
there may be in this philosophy, the husks will come soon 
enough at the best. Give the child the fruit. Give him 
work that will make him happy and contented and willing 
to remain in school. Remember with Eugene Field that, 

"It's the songs ye sing 
And the smiles ye wear, 
That's a makin' the sun shine everywhere 
Whatever the weather may be." 

The wholesome unrest in the past few years and the 



92 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

change in the outward form of the work are welcome 
signs. To borrow the thought of another, 
A Broader we find the reason for Plato's relation to 
sentiaf 8 " so many thinking men and women to-day, to 
be his willingness to give them all standing 
room in his conception. The present in industrial training 
owes its being largely to our willingness to allow, in ever 
increasing ratio, standing room to those who think dif- 
ferently from ourselves. It owes it also to the fact that a 
tradition may not be accepted unless based upon the 
philosophy of common sense. 

I take it as a healthful sign, that a conservative spirit 
has been manifest in this subject of hand 
work. Many have been slow to modify old 



tionaicon- ideas, seeing as they did, the extreme to 

servatism / 

which the enthusiastic advocates of the newer 
thought were wont to go. Naturally enough, some of 
these latter have discarded entirely, course, or planned 
out, work. Method has too often been cast aside, and the 
terms selj-expression, interest, individual initiative, have 
been warped out of perspective. In such instances the 
nature and content of the instruction have been left too 
exclusively to the whims of the child. The demands of 
the social and industrial phases of life have been construed 
to mean, what the child wants to do. The desires of the 
pupil are frequently only passing whims against which 
the greater experience of the teacher should surely count 
for something. We shall, therefore, consider the larger 
demands of society as a whole in shaping our work. 



INDUSTRIAL TRAINING 93 

We arc coming in this subject of hand work, to have a 
broad, tolerant, truly educational view. Let 

us see to ' lt that we sha11 not > as in the P ast > 



over - cur- defeat the very ends set for manual training 

ricularized" M i 

by over curncularizing" it, as we have 
other subjects. Only are real, actual, educational ends 
served when the work is related to the child, to the other 
school occupations, to the home life, and hence to the 
life after leaving the school. 

Perhaps the industrial arts can, in greater measure 
than most subjects, help the child to interpret 
cube ArtT the facts and forces that play about him, 
strengthen those habits that shall render him 
capable of being depended upon to perform a task at an 
appointed season and in the proper manner, put him in 
sympathy with his environment, enable him to appreciate 
those elements that shape his life and the lives of his 
fellows, render him capable of seeing his relations to so- 
ciety as a whole and the part he is to play therein, take 
from yesterday and to-day all that is good, and true, and 
noble, and work toward a to-morrow whose industrial, 
social, intellectual, and moral phases shall point ever 
progressward. 

Let us remember that in manual training, as elsewhere 
in school work, it is the man-made course of study that 
often fails to find its true place and that the child himself 
may frequently suggest the element of greatest value. 
The natural is more than the artificial. 

Some months since, I stood upon a mountain- top and 



94 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

saw far below into the wonderful valley where spire, 
and stream, and tree, stood out silent and beautiful. A 
companion turned to me after some moments of silence 
and said, "Man works upon a grand scale. See this 
valley, once barren and dreary and impeopled, now a 
garden spot of peace with its thousands of happy homes 
and its prosperous towns." "Yes," I replied, "man does 
work upon a grand scale; but God works upon a grander. 
See what nature has done," and there, stretching away 
as far as the eye could pierce, range upon range, and peak 
upon peak arose, one beyond another, canyon and scarred 
mountain side and snow-capped crest, without which no 
peaceful valley would have been possible. 

THESES 

1. The widespread introduction of the industrial arts 
necessitates the study of them by the regular teacher. 

2. The past few years have brought about many 
changes in the teaching of the subject. 

3. Many of the arguments put forward in favor of 
manual training were sound; others were fallacious and 
visionary. 

4. The term manual training is not sufficiently com- 
prehensive. 

5. Of the various motives prompting the introduction 
of hand work into the curriculum, we have as the most 
important : 

a. Love for and appreciation of labor. 

b. Satisfies the child's demand for creative activity. 



INDUSTRIAL TRAINING 95 

c. Understanding of our industrial life. 

d. Valuable as recreative work. 

e. Develops the physical powers. 

f. Deception cannot readily be practised in dealing 

with the arts. 

g. Gives general dexterity of hand. 

h. Lays foundation for one of several trades. 

i. Lends clearness to the other less concrete subjects. 

6. Two typical systems compared: 

a. The exercise system, or the making of abstract 

pieces exemplified by the Russian System. 

b. The model system, or the constructing of complete 

objects. The Swedish sloyd typifies this idea. 

7. While we have too often been guided by tradition 
alone, we have also adhered to old principles long ago 
forsaken by those who first put them forward. 

8. In order to break loose from the artificial tendency, 
environment and utility must be considered. 

9. Accuracy and technique are to be considered, but 
in connection with the thought values only. Systems and 
methods in hand work must give place to processes touch- 
ing closely the actual life of the pupil. Individual initia- 
tive, however, must not be construed to mean the mere 
whim of the individual. 

10. A broad and tolerant outlook and a rational con- 
servatism are necessary elements. 

11. Over "curricularization" will stultify and weaken 
hand work as it has other school subjects. Properly pre- 
sented, the industrial arts possess great educational value. 



96 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

TOPICS FOR STUDY 

1. Is manual training to be taught as a regular subject 
as are arithmetic and geography, or is it to become an illus- 
trative or expressive element in each of the other school 
subjects ? 

2. If the former, is the instruction to be given by special 
teachers, and are they being adequately trained ? 

3. If the latter, are we to have special teachers, or are 
the grade teachers to instruct in the arts ? 

4. How may the class teacher acquire a technical 
knowledge of processes and a realizing sense of the ne- 
cessity for such work ? 

5. Will the teaching then be conducted in the regular 
class room with special equipment ? 

6. Shall older boys and girls engage in like occupations, 
and if not, where shall differentiation for work between 
boys and girls begin, and what forms shall be given 
each? 

7. If the regular teacher carries the manual courses 
as well, shall we insist upon men for the upper grades; or 
if as under the present system of special instruction, are 
we to increase the force of male teachers; and in any 
event, how can we obtain them at the present salary rate ? 

8. At present, in most towns and cities where boys in 
the grades have from two to three years' instruction deal- 
ing chiefly with wood, is their interest in working with 
this material so weakened as to render them half-hearted 
in the woodwork courses of the high school ? 



INDUSTRIAL TRAINING 97 

9. Discuss in detail the likelihood that too much stress 
is laid upon technique and finish in the work accomplished, 
without sufficient attention to the thought side. 

10. Consider fully as to whether there is a false stand- 
ard underlying our interpretation of the term educational 
as applied to the arts, and whether the processes should 
touch more closely the actual demands of real life, that 
which we are pleased to term the utilitarian as opposed 
to the educational view. 

11. Should individual or communal work characterize 
the spirit of the grades or of the high school ? 

12. How is the beautiful in form, in construction, 
and in clecoration to become a part of the work? Should 
both design and construction be taught by the same 
teacher ? 

13. Consider the advantages and the disadvantages of 
following a rigidly defined course, as against allowing the 
pupil to do largely as he will. What is the rational ground 
to take here? 

14. How may the equipment provided for work along 
manual lines find a more complete use through evening 
or Saturday classes? 

15. What has the kindergarten to offer as an index of 
the trend that manual training should take ? 

1 6. Discuss the main reasons advanced for not mak- 
ing hand work a part of the course of study in every 
school. 

17. Under conditions as they now exist, deter- 
mine whether the general normal school can give all the 

Standards 7 



98 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

training necessary to equip special teachers of the 
arts. 

1 8. Make a list of the forms of work that can be taught 
in the various grades with small outlay and little equipment. 

19. Estimate the cost of equipping for hand work a 
room to accommodate classes of twenty pupils each. Do 
the same for a room to accommodate twenty girls in Do- 
mestic Science (cooking) and a like number in Domestic 
Art (sewing). 

20. Give the arguments in favor of teaching sewing or 
cooking, or both, to girls in the grades. Should the sew- 
ing be done in the regular class room? 

21. Consider the opportunities and limitations, in the 
several grades, of the following processes: 

a. Clay modeling. 

b. Pottery. 

c. Paper work. 

d. Cardboard construction. 

e. Bent iron. 

f. Metal spinning. 

g. Copper and brass work, 
h. Work in thin wood. 

i. Whittling. 

j. Bench work in wood, 

k. Weaving, and textiles. 

1. Basketry. 

m. Bookbinding, 

n. Domestic Science, 

o. Domestic Art. 



INDUS1 RIM. TRAINING < } < } 

22. Make a list of the larger cities in the United States 
where some form of industrial training is taught. 

23. What cities or towns having once introduced man- 
ual training have discontinued its use as a school subject ? 
What were the reasons given for such procedure? 

24. Shall sewing, cooking, and the household sciences 
be classed as industrial training subjects? 

25. Wherein is the term manual training inadequate? 
Suggest the term you consider most in keeping with the 
spirit of the work as now carried on. 

CONSULT' 

BALLIET Manual Training: Its Educational Value. 

59th Annual Report, Mass. Board of Edu- 
cation, p. 483. 

BALDWIN Industrial-Social Education for the Primary 

and Grammar School Grades. Proceed- 
ings Eastern Manual Training Association, 

1904, p. 104. 

BENNETT Russian System of 'Manual Training. Art 

Education, vol. 2, pp. 75, 148. 

CHAMBERLAIN Technical Education in Germany, sec. II. 
The Manual Element in the Schools of 
Germany. Manual Training Magazine, 
vol. i, p. 124. 

The Problems that Perplex. Proceedings Na- 
tional Educational Association, 1905, p. 558. 

DOPP The Place of Industries in Elementary Educa- 

tion. 

DEWEY The School and Society. 



IOO 



STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 



GILBERT Manual Training High Schools or Manual 

Training in High Schools. Proceedings Na- 
tional Educational Association, 1904, p. 614. 

HAM Mind and Hand. 

HANEY The Arts in Theory: A Statement of Ideals. 

Education, vol. 26, p. 161. 

HARVEY Manual Training in the Grades. Proceedings 

National Educational Association, 1905, 
p. 121. 

HENDERSON The Manual Training Outlook. Manual 
Training Magazine, vol. 2, p. 65. 

HILL The Manual Training Idea. Manual Train- 

ing Magazine, vol. i, p. i. 

JACKMAN The Constructive Idea in Education. Pro- 

ceedings National Educational Associa- 
tion, 1904, p. 594. 

KEYES True Test of Educational Manual Training. 

Proceedings, Eastern Manual Training 
Association, 1898, p. 7. 

LARSSON The Origin and History of the Sloyd in 

Sweden, etc. Proceedings Eastern Manual 
Training Association, 1899, p. 5. 

MANEY Industrial Training as a Social Factor. Man- 

ual Training Magazine, vol. 2, p. 129. 

McMuRRY How can Class Teachers be Educated to the 
Value of Manual Training? Proceedings 
National Educational Association, 1905, 

P- 5 6 3- 

MONROE The Educational Bearings of Manual Train- 

ing. Proceedings Eastern Manual Train- 
ing Association, 1903, p. 70. 



INDUSTRIAL TRAINING 



101 



O'SHEA Dynamic Factors in Education, chaps. 4 & 5. 

PABST Manual Training in Germany. Report of the 

Conference of Manual Training Teachers, 
London, 1903, p. 78. 

PARKER Talks on Pedagogics. 

RICHARDS Some Practical Problems in Manual Training. 

Manual Training Magazine, vol. 4, p. 142. 

How Early may Hand Work be made a part of 

the School Work? Proceedings National 

Educational Association, 1901, p. 100. 

SALOMON Theory of Sloyd. 

Hand Book of Sloyd. 

The Naas System and the Naas Models. Re- 
port of the Conference of Manual Training 
Teachers, London, 1903, p. 73. 

SCRIPTURE Manual Training and Mental Development. 
Manual Training Magazine, vol. i, p. 16. 

SEIDEL Industrial Instruction. 

WARI: The Educational Foundations of Trade and 

Industry. 

WOODWARD Rise and Progress of Manual Training. Re- 
port of the Commissioner of Education, 
1893-94, pp. 877-950. 
Manual Training in Education. 

WARN J R Teaching Trades in Connection with the Pub- 

lic Schools. Proceedings National Educa- 
tional Association, 1900, p. 492. 



CHAPTER IV 
THE MEANING OF CORRELATION 

CORRELATION of school studies, concentration, interre- 
lation, coordination, and the later term, unification, carry 
with them varying shades of content, while at the same 
time we find them frequently interpreted as meaning one 
and the same thing. Each term in the abstract means 
substantially nothing. Used thus the interpretation of 
its meaning is either so limited that its value is slight, or 
so broad and extensive that only a vague indefinite- 
ness attaches to it. To use one or another of these 
terms in the sense indicated would be as illogical as to 
say that a certain study made for mental development, 
since the term mental development may cover almost any- 
thing desired in the field of education. 

The subject of correlation is widely considered. Dur- 
ing the past two decades hardly a writer upon educational 
topics has failed to devote more or less space to a discus- 
sion of the genesis of correlation and to its application to 
school studies. The most discouraging feature of the 
whole matter is that many of the early exponents espe- 
cially, knew almost nothing about the subject. They 
simply restated in a new phraseology the utterance of 
some educational philosopher. 



THE MEANING OF CORRELATION 103 

One fallacy may also be said to have existed in most of 
the arguments advanced in substantiation of the various 
theories ; they evidently were not sound. 

That there are, however, certain fundamental principles 
underlying the doctrine of correlation cannot well be de- 
nied. What are these principles, what gives rise to 
them, and what are the educational implications of the 
doctrine ? 

Of the several basic facts as enunciated by Herbart in 
his educational philosophy, the doctrine of 
concentration may claim a prominent place. 
To the mind of Herbart, the school life of 
the child is too scattered ; the school studies too isolated, 
one from another. Just as the several members of a 
door-frame, or the parts of a machine have a certain defi- 
nite connection or interrelation, so should the various por- 
tions of a given subject be connected, and the different 
school studies associated together. Then instead of iso- 
lation we should have a thread of unity running through 
the entire school course. 

As an illustration of this thought, take the subject of 
literature. We cannot get at the true meaning of the 
literature of a people without at the same time coming 
into intimate touch with their history, their manners, 
their customs. Here again we find that geography, lo- 
cation, environment, physical conditions, cli- 
reiation mate, soil, are not only part and parcel 'of, 

but in reality are at the very base of, his- 
torical study, thus relating back to the literature. Hence, 



io 4 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

geography, history and literature are seen to have a di- 
rect connection, not superficially, but in fact. It is there- 
fore quite clear that history, mathematics or botany 
cannot be studied to the best advantage as a subject 
isolated, but must be thrown into certain interrela- 
tions. 

The doctrine of Herbart was taken up and enunciated 
in Germany by such men as Ziller, Stoy, and Rein and has 
had considerable support in our own country. To the 
idea as advanced by Herbart regarding the natural unified 
nature of the school subjects, must be added Froebel's 
thought of the unity of the human being. 

In the application of the correlation principle, two 

theories at once arise, these growing out of a difference 

of opinion as to the social basis of correla- 

we e a Gr UP tion - It: has been held b y some > that certain 
groups of school subjects naturally lend them- 
selves as centers for study, and around these centers the 
other school subjects should be arranged. For example, 
history and literature form one central group, the biologi- 
cal sciences another, while geography, geology and min- 
eralogy constitute a third group, and so on, each subject 
in these special groups being of equal value, one with 
another. Here we have several coordinate groups of 
studies. Again, a second theory places 
The Individ. eac ^ su bject in turn as the central one ; that 

ual Subject J 

as center is, the subject under consideration is the 

thing of concern. As the main element all 

other subjects must, for the time, be subsidiary to it and 



THE MEANING OF CORRELATION 105 

flow in to enrich its content. In this instance concen- 
tration plays the leading part. 

Since, however, the child is to be considered as the 
real center for study, and for correlation as well, it seems 
to be generally admitted that the so-called humanistic 
studies, as opposed to the formal, or those that seem to 
relate themselves most intimately to the actual social ex- 
istence of the child, should claim attention as central sub- 
jects. Mathematics, spelling and writing are 
Humanistic typical of the formal studies. Those ranking 

and Formal 

studies as humanistic would seem to include geogra- 

phy, history and the natural sciences, while 
to these may be added the industrial arts, including con- 
struction in any material whatsoever. This last classifi- 
cation is justified since the desire for expression on the 
part of the child is a controlling motive. It is further 
insisted that in the beginning, all else in school is seen in 
the light of self-expression and motor activity. To re- 
peat, the child is the center as the hub is the center of a 
wheel, the various activities and studies radiating as do the 
spokes. This makes the matter of correlation something 
from within, something intrinsic, something 

center Ud ** v * ta ^' ^ nsteac ^ * being added or tacked on to 
the outside. In this sense the necessity for 
correlation will be seen to exist not in the subject-matter 
itself, but in the very nature of the individual. 

Dr. Charles McMurry in his General Method says : 
" The center for concentrating effort in education is not 
so much the knowledge given in any school course as 



io6 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

the child's mind itself. We do not desire to find in the 
school studies a new center for a child's life, so much as 
the means for fortifying that original stronghold of char- 
acter which rests upon native mental characteristics and 
early home influences. We have in mind not the objec- 
tive unity of different studies considered as complete 
and related sciences, nor any general model to which 
each mind is to be conformed, but the practical union 
of all the experiences and knowledge that find entrance 
into a particular mind."* 

The one who first in our country put this idea of con- 
centration into definite form was Colonel Francis W. 
Parker. In his Talks on Pedagogics we find the follow- 
ing : " The center of all movement in education is the 
child. We must grant that human beings are absolutely 
governed by immutable, ever-acting, all-efficient laws of 
growth and development, and that all devel- 
ment means opment means conformity to the laws of 



being ; nonconformit y is decay, degradation, 

and death." In the same volume the au- 
thor says: "The present trend of study, investigation, 
and discovery in the science of education is toward the 

correlation and unification of educative sub- 
footemto? J ects and their concentration upon human 
Force development. All subjects, means, and 

modes of study are concentrated under this- 
doctrine upon economization of educative effort. In 
the unification and correlation of subjects of thought and 

*Chas. McMurry: Elements of General Method, First Edition, p. 98. 



THE MEANING OF CORRELATION 107 

expression, each subject, means, mode, and method finds 
its absolute and relative educational value, its definite 
place in the conditions for self-activity and self-effort." 

Here, then, would seem to be the main point of differ- 
ence between correlation and concentration, in so far as 
those who do not consider the terms as synonymous are 
concerned. Correlation has to do largely with school 
studies, while concentration covers not only 
con-elation t h e field of the former term but goes further, 

VB. Concen- 
tration penetrating the home life of the pupil ; pro- 
jecting itself into his sports, his social expe- 
riences ; in fact, having to do with the most fundamental 
problems of his nature. Once a correlation exists, then 
concentration may step in to relate the study, means, and 
modes to life interests. 

We have alluded to the term unification in an inciden- 
tal way only. What is the force, the application, and the 
value of the unification of studies, and wherein does it 
differ from the correlation idea ? 

In continuing the discussion upon the Report of the 

Committee of Fifteen, Doctor Emerson E. White, under 

the title Isolation and Unification as Bases of Courses of 

Study, speaks thus regarding the indefiniteness of our 

educational terminology : " One of the first conditions of 

the intelligent reading of a work on psy- 

SStoito* 7 chology is the determining of the definite 

meaning of the terms used by the author. A 

common source of disagreement is the use of words by 

one party with a larger or smaller content than the other, 



io8 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

and this is true even when these contents contain a 
considerable common element." * 

" We have an instructive example of this difficulty in 
the discussion of the past year over the place and value 
of correlation, coordination, and concentration in school 
instruction. The discussion has been a Babel of ideas, 
if not of tongues, and well-meant attempts to settle the 
pedagogical meaning of these terms have only added to 
the confusion. After all that has been said, several writ- 
ers for the educational journals are using the incongruous 
terms coordination and concentration as synonymous. One 
of the surprises of the profession was the expressed ex- 
pectation that a recent report on the * correlation of stud- 
ies ' would be devoted to a discussion of the theory of 
concentration." f Doctor White then goes on to say that 
his desire to avoid misunderstanding has led him to use 
the terms isolation, and unification, as denoting opposite 
processes and results. As Dr. White's discussion is based 
upon reports dealing with the correlation of studies, it 
would seem that he intends the term unification to carry 
the same content as the former term correlation. 

Studies are unified when two, three, or a half dozen 

are so brought together as to form a common 

tionidea a branch of study, the facts being so connected 

as to produce a rational trend of thought and 

the end or purpose to be attained, being a common end. 

* Report of the Commissioner of Ediuation^ 1895-96, p. 929; also Pro- 
ceedings Department of Superintendence, N. E. A., 1896. 
I Report of the Commissioner of Education, 1895-96, p. 930. 



T1IR MEANING OF CORRELATION 109 

Here the thought of the precedence of one subject over 
another has no place, it being possible for instance, for 
any one of several studies to be ranked equally, in their 
connection. The point is that there is such a fusion of 
subject-matter as to unify into a common whole. 

" The unification of subjects," says Parker, " takes for 
its hypotheses, first, the unity of the human being in de- 
sign ; second, the unity of the Creator and His creations ; 
and third, that approximating unity of the human being 
to his Creator is the sublime destiny of man. ' For He 
made man in His own image.' ' He has crowned him 
with glory and honor.' Unity of body, mind and soul, 
unity of educative effort, unity of action, unity of thought, 
and unity of thought and expression are the aims of the 
theory of Concentration." * Here, again we come from 
the unifying thought, considered from the point of 
view of its genesis, to the application of such thought in 
the principle of concentration. It would appear that the 
terms are really subjective and objective phases, respec- 
tively, of our whole educational fabric. 

The question of. coordination is bound up in that of 
unity. In the unifying of studies, it is conceived by 
some, notably by Dr. Harris, that there are certain coor- 
dinate groups of studies, as mentioned pre- 
Cobrdination viously under correlation. The groups may 

and the J 

Group idea number five, six, or seven, according as this 
or that classification appeals to the indi- 
vidual. But being coordinate groups, they are of equal 

* Talks on Pedagogics, p. 26. 



no STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

merit one with another. These groups have certain 
common features and can be brought into definite rela- 
tionships, but never upon the basis of precedence of one 
group over another. This, of course, is due to the fact 
that they differ in their genesis and in their very nature. 
Herein lies the chief difference between coordination 
and concentration. 

Again, the particular subjects going to make up a coor- 

dinate group may within themselves have a 

correlation correlative relationship. If history, language, 

in Coordi- , 

nate Groups and art are contained in one group, language 
and art may, for the time being, be subordi- 
nated to history ; that is, a correlation may exist among 
the three subjects. There can be, however, nothing 
but an equal relationship existing between the history 
group and that formed by the mathematical studies. 
" Complete unification is the blending of all subjects 
and branches of study into one whole and the teach- 
ing of the same in successive sections." " When this 
union is effected by making one group or branch of 
study in the course the center or core, and subordinating 
all other subjects to it, the process is properly called con- 
centration of studies." 

The unifying idea touches so closely the thought of 
the relative value of studies that our problem 
is complicated at this point. No present day 



and Relative educator speaks more strongly of a unified 

Values 

curriculum than does Dr. John Dewey, but 
the unity is coupled with the relative values and both have 



THE MEANING OF CORRELATION in 

their roots in the thought of the child as a social being. 
I shall quote from Dr. Dewey to illuminate still further 
this unification principle and also to point to the social 
basis of correlation. In his Ethical Principles Underlying 
Education he says : " A casual glance at pedagogical lit- 
erature will show that we are much in need of an ultimate 
criterion for the values of studies, and for deciding what 
is meant by content value and by form value. At pres- 
ent we are apt to have two, three, or even four different 
standards set up by which different values as disciplinary, 
culture, and information values are measured." * " There 
is no conception of any unifying principle. The point 
here made is that the extent and way in which a study 
brings the pupil to consciousness of his social environ- 
ment, and confers upon him the ability to interpret his 
own powers from the standpoint of their possibilities in 
social use, is this ultimate and unified standard." f 

There is nothing within the facts themselves, accord- 
ing to Dr. Dewey, to determine that they shall be classed 
as history, science, literature and the like. All subjects 
have the same office, namely, " the conscious experience 
of man." 

" It is only because we have different interests or dif- 
ferent ends, that we sort out the material and label part 
of it science, part history, part geography, and so on. 
Each of these subjects represent an arrangement of 

* Ethical Principles Underlying Education, p. 18. 
t Ethical Principles Underlying Education, p. 18. Quoted on p. 27, 
this volume. 



112 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

materials with reference to some one dominant or typical 
aim or process of the social life." * 

Present methods of school work give an entirely wrong 

idea of the relation of studies to each other. 

Unit 8 found ^he un ^7 ex isting in the various divisions of 

in the indi- geography, is due, not to some external fact, 

but rather to an intrinsic, vital principle, an 

"attitude of interest in the human mind toward them." 

All this does not mean that the various school studies 
must be unified and correlated at every point. It indi- 
cates simply the value and necessity for so doing where 
the proper conditions exist, the philosophy for such pro- 
cedure being found in the life, the activities, the social 
phases, the very nature of the child himself. " We should 
not seek to make a correlation where none exists," says 
Mr. James Chamberlain. A forced unity is not unity 
at all. 

And right here is where the teacher, anxious to be 
abreast of the times, desirous of doing for his 
o ang rtuni nd P U P^ S tne best possible service, here it is 
ties that the teacher so often makes a mistake. 

Enough has been said to show that subjects 
cannot be correlated simply by trying to teach several 
of them at one and the same time. Results under these 
conditions are simply absolute failures. When on the 
other hand the subject-matter is so closely classified as 
to permit the form only of any given study to be taught, 
the work is narrow and barren. 

* Ethical Principles Underlying Education, p. 19. 



'1 HE MEANING OF CORRELATION 113 

In the grades where a teacher must instruct in several 
subjects, there is much greater opportunity for correlation 
than exists in the upper school where departmental work 
is carried on and a specialist is responsible for each par- 
ticular subject. If the mathematics teacher looks only to 
the form of his work, if mathematical data are the Alpha 
and Omega of his teaching, he may have a class well 
drilled in mathematics ; but if he fails to demand a high 
standard of excellence when the pupil is called upon to 
express himself, if he receives written papers and exercises 
careless in execution and bristling with incorrect forms, 
if the papers give evidence of careless or slovenly work, if 
he permits this simply because the answer is there, and 
his is not the English or the Ethics class, he is missing 
one of the best opportunities the school affords for teach- 
ing the relation of studies, one to another, and of show- 
ing the practical application of the language arts to other 
subjects. 

In the cooking room we find too frequently no correla- 
tion of science with the actual mechanical process in- 
volved ; we find cooking only, not domestic science. Here 
the student should learn not simply to prepare the food 
properly, for this can be learned frequently at home. She 
should learn something of the chemistry of foods, the 
composition of the raw materials, the physiology of diges- 
tion, the effect upon the body of certain foods. And a 
score of other lessons should be taught along with that 
of how to prepare properly a given dish. 

These are only illustrations of the broad truth and 

Standards 8 



n 4 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

serve to show that so-called correlation is the only logi- 
cal, natural method. It is not desirable, however, nor 
would the process be one of correlation, if matter not 
germane be dragged in and forced to a place in the study 
being pursued. If this were done, we should not sim- 
plify, but only obscure from the pupil, the lesson or task. 
The philosophy of correlation and unification of studies 
is therefore seen to lie in the social side of the child's 
life, and the necessity for such unity exists to-day as 
never before. The spirit is spreading, industrialism is 
vastly more far-reaching than formerly, competition is 
keener, specialization is the order of the day, and the ap- 
plication of the arts and sciences to the affairs of every- 
day life is extremely differentiated. 

In the early days the school taught the so-called fun- 
damentals. A good general knowledge of 
cSSons a arithmetic, the ability to express one's self in 
strong AT- speech and with the pen in a passable man- 
coeia\i7n ner, the skill to write clearly and legibly, a 
general understanding of the geography of 
the earth, and the possession of a few of the more im- 
portant historical facts, these were the essentials of 
school education. In those days there was less necessity 
for the unifying of the curriculum than there is now. 
With the increase of subjects and the marked tendency 
to overcrowd and to make shallow, every effort must be 
sought to simplify and unify. In the evolution of society, 
children are taken out of touch with things and people. 
They should have brought to them in this particular the 



THE MEANING OF CORRELATION 115 

opportunities possessed by the children of a half-century 
ago. Society, properly considered, sets the standards for 
social existence. The child himself is the center ; all true 
study has a moral basis, and is concerned with the mani- 
festation of Divine thought in the universe and in man. 
The child, to come to a realization of self, must see 
and appreciate the relation of the various school subjects 
one to another. He must see also the relation of school 
to home, and be able to connect the whole with the great 
throbbing, pulsating life about him. The realization of 
this condition will be reached through the proper social- 
izing or unifying of the curriculum. 

THESES 

1. The terms correlation, concentration, etc., must not 
be used in the abstract, else vague concepts result. 

2. Herbart considered school work too scattered, and 
advocated a uniform course. 

3. Two theories (a) the group idea, and (b) the indi- 
vidual subject, as centers. 

4. The child is the real center ; the humanistic rather 
than the formal studies should be given the chief emphasis. 

5. Concentration is more fundamental than correlation ; 
unification used by Doctor White in sense of correla- 
tion; Parker's thought that unity is the aim of concentra- 
tion. 

6. A unified course means coordinate groups of stud- 
ies and correlation may exist between the various coor- 
dinate groups. 



n6 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

7. The relative value of studies is closely related 
to unification and both relate to the child as a social 
being. 

8. The individual furnishes the cause for, and aim in, 
correlation, and our present day conditions, social, indus- 
trial and otherwise, demand a unifying of the curriculum. 

TOPICS FOR STUDY 

1. What school studies lend themselves most readily 
to correlation ? 

2. Is it possible to get the most from the study of a 
subject, unless it is pursued distinctly as a subject in 
itself ? 

3. Is the correlation idea successfully carried out in 
the elementary school of to-day ? 

4. Can time be saved by bringing two or more sub- 
jects together for study ? 

5. If the child is the real center, how may we deter- 
mine whether teacher, child, or subject-matter shall point 
to the method of correlation at any given time ? 

6. When arithmetic or science is the subject to be 
taught, and hand work is to be correlated, what large 
questions must the teacher determine in laying out the 
work ? 

7. The value of concentration to the business or pro- 
fessional man. 

8. Outline a lesson in United States history, on the 
origin and work of the Hudson Bay Company, with no 
consideration for the correlative principle. 



7 HE MEANING OF CORRELATION 



117 



9. What should furnish the basis for determining the 
relative value of studies ? Would this standard be the 
same for every individual ? 

10. Does society consider the facts of everyday life 
in an associated sense, or separately ? Are the associa- 
tions made after individual study, or vice versa ? 

CONSULT 

DEWEY Ethical Principles Underlying Education. 

School and Society. 

GORDY A Broader Elementary Education, chap. 17. 

HARRIS Psychologic Foundations. 
HERBART Science of Education, p. 123. 
HANUS Educational Aims and Educational Values, 

chap. i. 

PARKER Talks on Pedagogics. 
McMuRRY Elements of General Method, p. 98. 
WHITE Report of Commissioner of Education, 1895-96, 

p. 29. 



CHAPTER V 
THE BASIS OF ETHICAL TRAINING 

PERHAPS no question has been more fully discussed 
in the educational world during the past few years than 
that of the moral training it should be the duty of the 
school to impart. The matter has been taken up by 
those representing all fields of educational activity, and 
press and platform have agitated, at least, even though 
they have not settled the question. 

As the thought of the value and the purpose of educa- 
tion has grown and expanded, it has become more and 
more apparent that moral training should hold a broader 
and more permanent place in any plan or scheme of school 
instruction, than it has done in the past. With the rapid 
commercial and industrial growth in our own country, 
a growth unparalleled in the history of forty centuries, 
with increased mental requirements and with the broad- 
ening and deepening of our social obligations, there 
comes also, as a logical result of our many- 
forMor2 sided development, an increased demand for 
Training finer ethical sensibilities, a necessity for 
higher standards in the moral tone of indi- 
vidual and community, a thoroughly appreciated need 
for clean, honest, respectful, right-minded, reverent boys 

118 



THE BASIS 01' ETHICAL TRAINING 119 

and girls; for tolerant, straightforward, fearless men and 
women. Never, I say, has the necessity for this been so 
apparent as now, when minds are absorbed by the am- 
bition to become possessed of material wealth, when the 
struggle for industrial supremacy takes the not always 
imaginative shape of a hand to hand encounter, when, in 
the hurry and jostle of the never ceasing onward march 
of civilization, man is likely to forget the common courte- 
sies and civilities he owes his brother and which it is his 
duty and privilege to observe. The possibilities for ad- 
vancement both from the mental and from the material 
side, the freedom for thought and expression in the po- 
litical arena and in the religious world, the chances open 
for the poorest, least opportunitied boy to become the 
master of millions or the leader of a people, these con- 
ditions, while giving to us the sturdiest of nations and the 
most strenuous men and women, tend too often to pro- 
duce citizens less mindful of the rights of others, less 
careful of giving the harsh word or of bestowing the un- 
kindly act, less considerate for their fellows than for 
themselves, less sensitive to loyalty to high ideals and 
observance of moral virtues than could be desired. 
And while this is true, no one, more than the teacher, 
appreciates to the full this too frequent lack 
^ e ffm 001 1. n the part of the boy or girl. Aside from 

should Teach J 

Morals the home influences, nowhere can right les- 

sons be taught so well as in the school. 
Here the intercourse of pupil with pupil reflects in small 
the great throbbing, pulsating world without. Here the 



120 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

boy has duties and obligations; he meets others in friendly 
rivalry or in honest cooperation; he must be serious and 
sad, happy and cheerful; he is to give and take, to ask 
and receive, to compete and assist, to accept and reject; he 
must create and destroy, analyze and compare, investigate 
and decide, learn and unlearn, and everywhere and always, 
hi school and out, unless all that is learned, unless all 
that the boy becomes is based upon a sound appreciation 
of ethical and moral life and responsibility, the real work 
of the school is not accomplished, and failure, not success, 
is the reward of the individual and the achievement of 
education. A study of the history of education shows 
that with early peoples, and following down even to our 
own time, what moral instruction was given had a special 
place in the program of the school. Among certain 
peoples this instruction was purely religious, as in Israel, 
and comprehended in fact the education of the day. At 
other times and in other places where moral and religious 
training received less attention, they were, however, 
taught as subjects in themselves, without regard to their 
connection with other school subjects, or with the actual 
life of the pupil. 
In trying to determine the place moral instruction 

should occupy in the school, we must again 
tiufschooi return to the question: For what does the 

school stand? What is education? Since 
we have already determined that education is actual, not 
seeming, participation in life, that it keeps continually be- 
fore the mind the thought of mutual helpfulness and 



THE BASIS OF ETHICAL TRAINING 121 

mutual sympathy, that it deals with dynamic, not static, 
forces, then we must see, if this indeed be education, that 
thcTc is a deep and vital connection between intellectual 
and moral training, and that the latter is at the base of 
any true and sufficient system of school instruction. 

This question then presents itself: How shall we pro- 
ceed that we may bring about the proper 
balance of results in the moral and ethical 
life of the pupil? Can this best be done by 
setting aside a special time and place in school work for 
such teaching, that is, by so arranging the program that 
a study of morals will find an intrinsic place in the cur- 
riculum ? Let us examine the question. 

This plan has been and is being thoroughly tried. It 
can no longer be called an experiment. In parochial 
schools and in many private institutions in our country 
and quite commonly in the schools of England and the 
continent, moral instruction, under one or another name, 
is included as a regular branch of study. No doubt much 
good is accomplished in this way, but the results are any- 
thing but satisfactory. The query as to whether a better 
plan cannot be proposed finds answer, I believe, in the 
native good sense of the vast number of teachers as well 
as in the results as shown here and there. 

The school courses should be so constructed as to place 
the desired principle in the very foundation of all work. 
While each lesson shall be a lesson in truth, in morals, 
the process is, so far as the pupil is concerned, an uncon- 
scious one. He need not be told at the close of each reci- 



122 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

tation that this or that moral point should be carried away, 
as was formerly the case when, in a given lesson, the moral 
had to be "drawn" at its close. Where the mind is re- 
quired to dwell for a considerable period upon the re- 
sults of wrongdoing, or upon the rewards and prizes 
achieved from the observance of the right, the imma- 
ture student is too prone to treat the whole matter as 
" preaching," and to think less seriously than he otherwise 
would. 

Good books have been prepared and excellent sugges- 
tions made for the training of the ethical self in this 
formal manner, but book instruction here, as in some 
other fields of education, seems not to have accomplished 
its purpose. The idea has somehow been held that the 
ethical life is something apart from the workaday ex- 
istence of men, that character and morals appear in the 
abstract, that their more subtle development is carried on, 
not in connection with, but aside from, that of the mental 
and physical life. 

In this sense character is conceived as a veneer. Karl 

Schmitz says: "The proof of any method or 

Part'of/not system is found in the character of the people 

Apart from, using it." Character is developed in the be- 

Everyday . ? 

Life ginning, not so much through conscious 

effort on the part of the pupil, as in following 
day by day, the good example set by teacher and associate. 
"Scarcely any connection exists," says Spencer, "be- 
tween morality and the discipline of ordinary teaching. 
Mere culture of the intellect (and education as usually 



I HE BASIS OF ETHICAL TRAINING 123 

conducted amounts to little more) is hardly at all opera- 
tive upon conduct. Creeds pasted upon the mind, good 
principles learnt by rote, lessons in right and wrong, will 
not eradicate vicious propensities; though people in spite 
of their experience as parents and citizens, persist in 
hoping they will." * 

Moral and ethical training, viewed in the light of what 
has already been said, assumes a vastly different aspect 
than that usually pertaining to it. Looking therefore 
toward the desired end, and keeping in mind the conclu- 
sions already drawn, the following argument is offered, 
an argument not frequently used in this connection. 

The moral training of the pupil cannot be brought 
about without a thorough regard for discipline; it is not 
possible to obtain discipline without attention, and the 
latter in turn cannot be had unless there is a deep and 
satisfying interest on the part of the pupil, in the subject 
in hand. 

(a) INTEREST 

Ideas are many and varied regarding the part played 
by interest in education. The Herbartian conception of 
the nature of interest differs widely from that of many. 
Herbart asserts that interest is not of a secondary nature, 
but fundamental. It is not in the sendee of instruction. 
We do not have an interest in order that we may learn; 
we learn that an interest may be excited. With Herbart, 
interest comes after, not before instruction. An interest 

* Social Statics, National Education, p. 173. 



124 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

not only in the school, but one that shall carry over into 
all the work of later life is the aim of the school; and this 
interest is gained through instruction. 

Another view of the nature of interest places it as a 
fundamental. Interest is basic. Given the proper con- 
ditions, environment, and subject-matter, the pupil will 
become interested. Once interest is excited, the mind is 
in a condition to receive instruction. 

Whatever views we may as individuals hold regarding 
the precedence of interest, we must all admit its value. 
Many sided interest should be aimed at, an interest 
that shall cover not only one phase of the subject, but 
such as shall be broad in its scope. This means at the 
very beginning the study of concrete things, rather than 
the presentation of pure or abstract problems. 
ib n stract r The dead materials of the text-book alone 
are not sufficient. Doctor William T. Har- 
ris in the Report of the Committee of Fifteen says: "The 
printed page is the chief means by which the pupil shall 
add to his own observation and reflection what has been 
observed and thought by men especially gifted in these 
things. The pupil shall learn by mastering the text-book 
how to master all books, how to use that greatest of in- 
struments of culture, the library. In the presence of the 
book he can take the sentences, one by one, and reflect 
carefully upon the meaning of each word and each sen- 
tence." 

These statements may be true regarding comparatively 
mature minds, they may hold with some degree of exact- 



THE BASIS 01 ETHICAL TRAINING 125 

mss in the adult world, but Doctor Harris has outlined 
an ideal condition. Before the child can run, he must 
learn to walk. Before he can fully appreciate and master 

the printed page and ponder wisely upon the 
^symbols meaning of each word and each sentence, 

he must first be interested in those things for 
which the words of the printed page are but symbols. 
With an interest firmly established, the pupil may go for- 
ward to more abstruse ideas and conceptions. 

The child is interested naturally in that which makes 
for his welfare, in his food, shelter, clothing, playmates. 
He is interested in his surroundings, in those portions of 
his environment that touch and affect him at his work 
and play. Until the child goes to school, he is intensely 
interested in the great world of nature. The situations are 
real; the man, the animals, the rocks, the fields and the 
trees, water and sunshine, marbles and leapfrog, the swim- 
ming hole and the toboggan slide, to the child all these 
are actual. He finds a use for each and, in a greater or 
less degree, appropriates all of them to his own advantage. 
He sells papers upon the street and makes the correct 
change, although he has never been taught the principles 
underlying the fundamental operations or struggled with 
fractions. He performs the operations without even ask- 
ing himself the reason for the fact, or tracing in logical 
order each step in the operation. He plays marbles "for 
keeps," and the necessary mathematical processes are 
carried on without any wrenching of the mathematical 
laws. He wishes to construct a pool sufficiently deep and 



126 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

wide to sail his boat. He scrapes out the soil and throws 
a dam across the stream. In all these undertakings he is 
interested. How different, however, when he takes him- 
self to school! Shakespeare pictures it thus: 
Reaisitua- The w hining school boy with his satchel, 

tions Differ. ,,. . , . ,., 

ent from and shining morning face, creeping like snail 
dittcm^ 00 unwillingly to school." Here is the atmos- 
phere likely to be artificial. He must learn 
that three and four are seven. No natural desire springs 
up within him for this knowledge. Not only must he 
learn that three and four are seven, but he must know why 
this is so, just as Dodd was expected to tell what it meant 
to "lean agin a tree." * No matter if he should discover 
a short cut or simplified method of reaching the answer, 
he must still trace the never ending sequence in the steps 
that have been so carefully thought out for him. 

In these things he is likely to find little to attract, and 
here lies the suggestion as to the child's natural interests. 
See that the proper environment for growth is furnished 
and lead the child to grapple with it. Not necessarily 
something easy; on the contrary, it may be difficult indeed. 
In the beginning, let the situations be real; the needs, 
actual, not fancied; the desires, healthy. 

Do not understand me to say that nothing to which 
he is not at once attracted can be learned by the pupil. 
Lessons may be learned, but are not so readily under- 
stood or retained in memory. The mind of the child is 
not likely to work so understandingly without interest as 

* William Hawley Smith : Evolution of Dodd. 



THE BASIS OF ETHICAL TRAINING 127 

with it; and unless there is a clear understanding, the im- 
ages, if they do not entirely fade from the mind, will be 
dim or uncertain at best. 

It is insisted by some that the child should be led to 

do, from time to time, those things in which 

riv* 8 n for the he may not be interested, or in which he 

study of the may think he has no interest. While it is 

Uiiintercst- -11* 

^ the unusual that is sometimes necessary to 

catch the eye, it is a mistake to continue to 
resort to the unusual. In the everyday walks of life the 
individual has to do with everyday things; hence, say 
they, he must learn to be content with the monotony of 
the common place. This he can best learn to do by 
drilling while in school, upon what may at the time seem 
dull and uninteresting. These school men further as- 
sert that if, as some believe, the school is, or should be, a 
model society where children are trained for life, or where 
life in its many forms actually exists, then it is equally 
true that the pupils should be trained to do tasks in the 
same way, or after the same manner or pattern as that 
followed by their elders. When the pupils take their 
places in the grown up world, they will find constantly 
that their own good and the good of society demands 
that tasks be performed by them, tasks in which they 
have no considerable degree of interest. Never to deviate 
from the principle that the child may do those things 
and those only in which he thinks himself interested, is 
to do him an injustice. Hence, they conclude, he grows 
selfish, narrow and conceited. He may finally lose con- 



128 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

fidence in himself and in his teacher, and come into dis- 
honest habits. 

A rational view of the subject of interest is taken by 
Professor James when he says: "We have of late been 
learning much of the philosophy of tenderness in educa- 
tion; ' interest ' must be assiduously awakened in every- 
thing, difficulties must be smoothed away. Soft peda- 
gogics have taken the place of the old steep and rocky 
paths to learning. But from this lukewarm air the brac- 
ing oxygen of effort is left out. It is nonsense to suppose 
that every step in education can be interesting. The 
fighting impulse must often be appealed to. Make the 
pupil feel ashamed of being scared at fractions, or being 
'downed' by the law of falling bodies; rouse his pugnacity 
and pride and he will rush at difficult places with a sort 
of inner wrath at himself that is one of his best moral 
faculties. A victory scored under such conditions becomes 
a turning-point and crisis of his character." * 

Many insist that the play spirit is entirely too common 

to-day in education. The claim is made that 

Tasifno? m order to interest our pupils more readily, 

Necessarily we are making play of all the more serious 

ingonf 6 duties f the Sch L If this be true > and T 

doubt not it may be in some quarters, no 

sympathy is expressed here for such existing condition. 

To interest the pupil does not at all mean that tasks are 

to be made simple and easy. 

True interest, however, where the child mind is con- 

* Talks to Teachers, pp. 54-55. 



THE BASIS OF 1 TIIICAL TRAINING 129 

cerned, does not lie in the direction of the hidden mean- 
ing, the abstract symbol, the artificial catch word; it finds 
its source in things at hand, in the facts and forces of 
tin- environment which can be used, appropriated, and 
modified to serve useful ends; in the circumstances, the 
people, the events, the materials which find a response in 
the life of the individual, and which in turn help the in- 
dividual to find himself. This does not mean 
The Teacher tnat wc must re j y wno lly upon the child to 

is not 

ignored determine his actual interests. He is to be 

carefully watched and guarded, the lines of 
his dominant interests must be studied, and in turn di- 
rected, as seems for his best development. From time to 
time these dominant interests change and these changes 
the teacher must carefully note and study, for through 
them will he be enabled to approach close to the child, 
to gain his confidence, learn his likes and dislikes, his 
strengths and weaknesses, his traits of char- 

onolrnhfant aCtCI> 5 tnrou g h them he must hel P him to 

interest the learn how to overcome acquired evil tend- 
Any encies, to counteract wrong teaching of the 
home or street, or to supplement the benefi- 
cial home training. By study and understanding and by 
allowing for the pupil's interests, we have one of the best 
avenues open for moral training. By ignoring this fact 
we drive from school many who would otherwise remain. 

(6) ATTENTION 

The second point to be noted is that of attention. At- 

Standards 9 



130 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

tention may be discussed under a variety of forms and in 
a varied terminology. For our purpose, however, only 
two forms may be noted: voluntary attention, or that 
form gained through an effort of the will, and involuntary 
attention, or that gained through little or no will action. 
These two types would conform to the effort vs. the in- 
terest phases as discussed by Doctor Dewey. With a 
many-sided interest in any lesson or task, comes a spon- 
taneous or involuntary form of attention. The untrained 
mind of the child is not sufficiently strong to give attention 
through the centering of the will. The study matter must 
be so arranged as to claim the attention without excessive 
volition or will power. 

The close relation that interest bears to involuntary, 
or spontaneous, attention is at once under- 

may beg?ven stood A11 those wh have to d with children 

without know how necessary it is that the attention 

be directed to the subject or lesson, if results 
are to be achieved. They know, too, how difficult it is 
to secure for more than a short period at most, the close, 
undivided attention of the pupil, and that the more im- 
mature the pupil the greater the necessity that his interest 
be awakened, in order to claim better the attention. Let 
the teacher note how spontaneous and natural is the at- 
tention of the pupil while at play. In his games, no ar- 
tificial means are necessary to concentrate the attention. 
In the various activities, in building up and in tearing 
down, in carrying on in small the occupations of the real 
life about him, in these the child has complete interest. 



THE BASIS OF ETHICAL TRAINING 131 

\Vlu-n, however, the teacher finds she must call upon the 
class to attend, when she must beg and entreat, threaten 
and command, then must the fault lie without, not within 
the pupil, and then will the attention, given under such 
circumstances, be superficial rather than actual. 

Here the course of study steps in to play its part. Our 
chief concern must be so to shape the work that it shall 
appeal to the individual mind. The danger lies in two 
directions. The work must not be over difficult, else the 
pupil, unable to grasp and comprehend, will find no mag- 
net to draw the attention. Neither must the lessons be 
so simple as to call for no mental reaction, for then will 
there appear no necessity for attention. At this point the 
principle of apperception comes to our aid, for with a 
previous knowledge of some or all of the points involved, 
the mind at once reaches out, attends. The known in 
the old seeks to lay hold of the knowable in the new; 
likenesses and differences are noted and the pupil has won 
the battle for himself. 

It is not claimed by all, however, that this form of at- 
tention is the highest in the scale of mental development, 
and it should only be used, they affirm, as a stepping-stone 
to the deeper and more vital form of volun- 
ctows hito 7 tarv attention. The purpose should be so 
thevoiun- to train the mind that unconsciously the will 

taryForm . , 

is more and more brought into play; otherwise, 
the mental machinery becomes as flabby as an unused 
muscle and the entire mind attitude will be a succession 
of indecisions. 



132 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

An excellent illustration of this view is given in Mr. 
Westcott's David Harum, where Mr. Carling, having 
found to his dismay that he has dressed with one russet 
shoe and one black one, proceeds to argue the question. 
"First he was in favor of the black shoes as being thicker 
in the sole, and then he reflected that they hadn't been 
blackened since coming on board. It seemed to him that 
the russets were more appropriate any way, but the blacks 
were easier to lace. Had I noticed whether the men on 
board were wearing russet or black, as a rule, and did 
Alice remember whether it was one of the russets or one 
of the blacks that he was saying the other day pinched his 
toe? He didn't quite like the looks of the russet shoe 
with dark trousers, and called us to witness that those 
he had on were dark; but he thought he remembered 
that it was the black shoe which pinched him. He sup- 
posed he could change his trousers and so on, and so on." 

There is one danger, too, of exacting the attention 

when, with the young pupils, the subject 

mayieadto or metn d of presentation is beyond them, or 

instability uninteresting. A habit of desultory oscilla- 

ofMind . J 

Attitude tion, of wavering backward and forward, a 
dreamy, half-hearted attention is encouraged, 
and thus makes more difficult the securing of the volun- 
tary form. In other words, the teacher should train, de- 
velop, and educate into the latter. Voluntary attention 
suggests at once the idea of concentration. Much has 
been written upon the importance of concentration to 
the learner, yet the last word has not been said. Prop- 



THE BASIS OF ETHICAL TRAINING 133 

eriy to attend, the mind must be directed toward, and 
tied fast to, the object, the thing, the lesson. The wander- 
ing mind becomes a vagabond. If the work is not such 
as to compel the mind to concentrate, to give attention, 
then it becomes sluggish and lazy. To be voluntarily 
alive leads to alertness, to spontaneity and development. 
Then not only are positive lessons learned through the 
giving of attention, but the mind being centered upon 
the lesson or task, is not engaged in some less profitable 
occupation, is not concerned with those things that work 
contrary to the moral well-being. 

(c) DISCIPLINE 

Granted now that interest and attention are gained, 
the third point, that of discipline, will take care of itself. 
It will certainly be present if the proper mental attitude 
has been assumed by the pupils. The matter of disci- 
pline is, in itself, a serious problem. Among a number 
of teachers each holding the same view as to its value in 
school work, there may be a wide difference of opinion as 
to what constitutes good discipline. 

It is a mistake to suppose that adherence to military 
rule denotes a high standard of discipline. The calmest 
and quietest pupils, may, in fact, be giving the minimum 
of attention. What I wish to say is this: the outward 
appearance and attitude of the pupil usually is, but may 
not always be, indicative of attention to the work in hand 
or of adherence to discipline. Frequently are pupils found 
who, through physical disability, perhaps, are unable to 



I 3 4 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

hold themselves to the outward forms of attention, but 
will upon examination show themselves thoroughly alive 
to the lesson or the task. On the other hand, the teacher 
will many times find that those who appear to be giving 
marked attention are really wool gathering, and must be 
recalled to the present. 

One illustration will suffice, as parallels will be found 

in the experience of every teacher. The 

Outward writer recalls that in a certain class, one boy 

Marks of . . , ... -, , - 

Discipline m particular seemingly gave the closest of 
attention, his attitude at all times being above 
question. Almost invariably, however, was his mind upon 
something other than his lesson. Seldom were his thoughts 
centered, as would seem to be the case judging from his 
bodily attitude. In the same class a boy of nervous 
temperament and apparently undisciplined, and one who 
would have been picked out as of a mind-wandering, care- 
less, inattentive disposition, was one of the ready pupils 
in the group. Of a sensitive and nervous disposition, he 
would leave his seat, stand, and face around in the aisle, 
but when a question or a request for an expression came 
to him, he was seldom found wanting. 
Aristophanes in his Clouds says: 

"I prepare myself to speak 
Of manners primitive and that good time 
Which I have seen, when discipline prevailed, 
And modesty was sanctioned by the laws. 
No babbling then was suffered in the school; 
The scholar's text was silence. The whole group 
In orderly procession sallied forth 
Right onward without straggling 



THE BASIS OF ETHICAL TRAINING 135 

To attend their teacher in harmonics. 

Though the snow fell on them thick as meal, the hardy brood 

Breasted the storm uncloaked. Their harps were strung 

Not to ignoble strains, for they were taught 

A loftier key, whether to chant the name 

Of Pallas terrible amid the blaze 

Of cities overthrown; or wide and far to spread, 

As custom was, the echoing peal." 

From our modern educational standpoint, the quotation 
indicates another and perhaps a more extreme view. We 
find too frequently such a lack of discipline and obedience 
as leads to entire irreverence for right or for the welfare 
of others. Too often, I say, do we find the pupil's educa- 
tion in this direction such as to run counter to the laws 
of society. 

It happens not infrequently that one pupil in a class is 

the cause of more anxiety and thought on the 

Refractory P ar ^- ^ * ne t eacner > than are all other mem- 

Pupiionthe bers of the class combined. The insistence 

Right Side 

of the one upon doing as he pleases without 
consideration for his associates, or regard for suggestion 
from the teacher, tends to produce a school lacking in the 
best kind of discipline and leads the individual on to an 
utter disregard for moral obligation and right living. 
It is here that the tact of the teacher must be shown. 
Moralizing, imploring or threatening will seldom be 
sufficient to conquer the difficulty, and in all likelihood 
will do harm rather than good. Neither should the 
teacher resort to that method so frequently advocated, 
of striving to have the pupil do right for the teacher's 
sake, or to please the latter. Let the teacher find some 



136 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

dominant interest of the refractory pupil; let him study 
this and invent some means of directing this interest into 
proper channels. There is no pupil so careless, so in- 
attentive, so disobedient, as not to be amenable to dis- 
cipline, if he is thoroughly understood and properly 
handled. In this connection Spencer says, "Do but gain 
a boy's trust; convince him by your behavior that you 
have his happiness at heart; let him discover that you 
are the wiser of the two; let him experience the benefits 
of following your advice and the evils that arise from 
disregarding it; and fear not you will readily enough 
guide him." * 

Obedience must be had; and this obedience should be 

carried over into the realm of choice. Care- 

Obedience lessness and dishonesty follow disobedience; 

must become ' 

Choice truthfulness and self-reliance will grow out 

of obedience. The child must be guided to 
that point where choice shall determine that he will be on 
the side of honesty, of right, and of justice. 

To accomplish this in the school is certainly no mean 
task. Shall the child be obedient simply because the 
teacher says he must? Shall obstacles be thrown in the 
way and the educational path filled with underbrush in 
order that the pupil may select the right and thus gain 
strength of character? He must learn to do right for the 
sake of right; he must choose the best because he can be 
content with nothing less; he must look upon honest ac- 
tion and straightforward dealing, not as a namby-pamby 

* Social Statics, " The Rights of Children," pp. 85-86. 



7 '///: HASIS OF ETHICAL TRAINING 137 

conception, but as the only avenue through which he can 
keep his own self-respect, or merit the appreciation of 
others. He must be willing to be right at the expense of 
standing alone. 
That discipline and obedience are often lacking, is 

forcefully portrayed by Mr. Elbert Hubbard. 

^e says: " No man has endeavored to carry 



Difficult to ou t an enterprise where many hands were 
needed, but has been well-nigh appalled at 
times by the imbecility of the average man the inability 
or unwillingness to concentrate on a thing and do it. 
Slipshod assistance, foolish inattention, dowdy indiffer- 
ence, and half-hearted work seem to rule; and no man 
succeeds, unless by hook or crook, or threat, he forces 
or bribes other men to assist him; or mayhap, God in his 
Goodness, performs a miracle, and sends him an Angel of 
Light for an assistant. You, reader, put this matter to a 
test: You are sitting now in your office six clerks are 
within call. Summon any one and make this request: 
' Please look in the encyclopedia and make a brief memo- 
randum for me concerning the life of Correggio.' Will 
the clerk quietly say, 'Yes, sir,' and go and do the task? 
" On your life he will not. He will look at you out of a 
fishy eye, and ask one or more of the following questions: 

" 'Who was he? 

" 'Which encyclopedia? 

" 'Where is the encyclopedia? 

" 'Was I hired for that? 

" 'Don't you mean Bismarck? 



138 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

" 'What's the matter with Charlie doing it? 
" 'Is he dead? 
" 'Is there any hurry? 

" 'Shan't I bring the book and let you look it up your- 
self? 
" ' What do you want to know for ? ' 

"And I will lay you ten to one that after you have 
answered the questions, and explained how to find the 
information, and why you want it, the clerk will go off 
and get one of the other clerks to help him to try to find 
Garcia and then come back and tell you there is no 
such man. Of course I may lose my bet, but according 
to the Law of Average, I will not." * 

One would rarely speak in too forceful terms of the 
bearing of obedience upon moral character. He who has 
himself learned to obey can lead others to learn the same 
lesson. "Servants, obey your masters," is a wise adage. 
Before one can be a good leader he must first learn to 
serve. Disobedience in little things leads finally to acute 

difficulties. The teacher must use judgment 
Make Rea- and suggest nothing to be done that is not 

entirely just and reasonable, and within the 

range of possibility. Having made a sugges- 
piied with tion, which under ordinary conditions should 

be all that is necessary (and under ordinary 
conditions also, the suggestion should be made only once), 
he must see to it that it is followed to the letter. "Pre- 
cepts often heard and little regarded, lose by repetition the 

* A Message to Garcia. 



are 



THE BASIS OF ETHICAL TRAINING 139 

small influence they had." * A ready and cheerful re- 
sponse on the part of the pupils, to rational suggestions 
and requirements will go far toward training in right 
habits of obedience and in laying the foundation of moral 
character. 

It is quite clear that there is not only a close relation 
existing between school discipline and moral education, 
but in certain of their phases they touch and overlap, 
becoming one and the same principle. 

"There are four cardinal rules which relate directly 
to school discipline," says Doctor Harris. 

wSSET " The child must be re S ular and P unctual > 
piine silent and industrious." Moral training is 

character training, and discipline has a great 
part to perform in the formation of character. "Char- 
acter," says Novalis, "is the completely rounded will." 
The moral status of the individual must be such as to 
fit him to perform willingly and cheerfully two classes of 
duties: those relating to his own welfare and those touch- 
ing the well-being of others. Broadly speaking, there is 
no clash between these two sets of duties. What is really 

best for the individual is best for society; and 
Relation of conversely, what is for the best interests of 

Individual to /' 

society society is most fitting for the individual. 

This must be so since society places the 
standard for moral action, f In learning the twofold les- 
son of self-reliance and mutual helpfulness, an altruistic 

* Spencer : The Study of Sociology, chap. 15, p. 366. 
t See this volume, p. 24. 



140 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

spirit is developed in the pupil. He gains that character 
which is "in general uniformity and fixedness of the whole 
of will." 

Herbart says: "Children have at first no real moral 

character. It arises gradually and begins 

Moral char- w hen here and there single moral volitions 

acterofthe . . .. 

Child arise from the union of similar acts of will. 

These more general determinations of will 
action, which through the apperception begin to accept or 
reject the new will actions, form the beginning of the sub- 
jective side or subjective foundations of character; over 
against this stands the objective past, or the single will 
act which results from a manifold of desires. The sub- 
jective part of character is that which determines; the ob- 
jective part is that which is determined." 
Moral education, like all other education deserving the 
name, is not a certain knowledge; but it is 
a training in the moral life the practice of 



Moral Edu- morality; it is the entering upon a good, up- 
right and useful life. "Moral education be- 
gins in infancy; and is affected, influenced, continued by 
everything that the eyes see, that the ears hear, that the 
hands touch and handle and by all the thoughts that are 
awakened in the child's mind by what is seen by it, or 
said or done in its presence. Therefore moral education 
is effected chiefly through the child's most constant asso- 
ciations. Those with whom the child spends most time, 
have most to do with his moral training, whether it is the 
pupils in the school, the workmen who are building the 



-JIU-: /mv.v 0* ETHICAL / i 4I 

house next door, the men who take care of the horses in 
the stable, the teacher in the school, or the family in the 
home." "I count it as one of the most hurtful delusions 
upon this subject of moral training to sup- 
pose that any great effect can be produced by 
what is said to the child, or what the child 



studies out of a book, in regard to the prin- 
ciples of morality. These methods are useful and have 
their place no doubt; but the great effect is produced by 
the sum total of the associations of the developing mind. 
What is done in the presence of pupils in school will stand 
for more than what is said to them, or what the book or 
page says to them." 

Says Doctor Dewey in speaking of the school, "The de- 

mand is for social intelligence, social power, 

The school social interests. Our resources are, (i) the 

as a Moral 

Agent life of the school as a social institution in 

itself; (2) methods of learning and doing work, 
and (3) the school studies or curriculum. In so far as the 
school represents, in its own spirit, a genuine community 
life; in so far as what are called school discipline, gov- 
ernment, order, etc., are the expressions of this inherent 
social spirit; in so far as the methods used are those which 
appeal to the active and constructive powers, permitting 
the child to give out, and thus to serve; in so far as the 
curriculum is so selected and organized as to provide the 
material for affording the child a consciousness of the 
world in which he has to play a part, and the relations he 
has to meet; in so far as these ends are met, the school is 



142 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

organized on an ethical basis. So far as general princi- 
ples are concerned, all the basic ethical requirements are 
met. The rest remains between the individual teacher 
and the individual child." * 

But after all there is an abnormal tendency to eliminate 
from the school any suggestion of religious instruction. 
In many localities the use of the Bible is prohibited to the 
schools, legislation having been enacted to forbid reading 
of the Scriptures. Discrimination is not made between 
religious and moral instruction upon the one hand, and 
sectarian teaching upon the other. No teacher should be 
denied the use of any book, the teachings of which go to 
strengthen the moral fiber of the individual. If religion 
is necessary to develop the moral tone of the school, no 
hand should be laid upon the teacher who brings to his 
aid the Bible. Denominational and doctrinal teachings 
should, of course, have no place. 

The words of President Butler are significant; he says: 
u The religious element may not be permitted to pass 
wholly out of education, unless we are to cripple it and 
render it hopelessly incomplete. . . . It is enough to 
point out that the religious element of human culture is 
essential; and that, by some effective agency, it must be 
presented to every child whose education aims at com- 
pleteness or proportion." f 

Strange it is indeed that in the evolution of the school 

* Ethical Principles Underlying Education, p. 26 ; quoted in part on 
P- 54- 

t The Meaning of Education, pp. 30-31, 



THE BASIS OF ETHICAL TRAINING 143 

we should pass from a time in which the teaching of so- 
called religion was the principal excuse for its existence, 
to the present, when the very word religion is eliminated 
from the phraseology of the teacher. Even as a book of 
literary worth we are fast doing away with the Bible in 
school, and we seem fearful of drawing upon its pages 
for lessons in moral and religious instruction. Are we to 
lose sight of the lessons to be drawn from the life of the 
Great Teacher? Other great lives we study for the in- 
spiration, and enthusiasm, and moral strength they give 
us. Shall that life be ignored which, simple in its sim- 
plicity and human in its humanity, gives us out of a few 
short years such experiences, parables and moral lessons 
as to cause Him to be remembered through nineteen cen- 
turies of war and turmoil and change and development? 
The strong words of Professor Jackman are in point: 
"Unless," he says, "we can pursuade ourselves that 
present day graft is an allegory, we need the Bible chiefly 
for neither its fables nor its myths, but for its straight- 
out-from-the-shoulder teachings that Jesus and the 
prophets leveled toward the evils of their day. There- 
fore, along with the piety of the heathen philosopher, I 
would see practically worked into every year of school 
life, and all the years thereafter, the plain and simple, the 
beautiful and understandable, teachings of Christ. If 
that means teaching religion, then teach it; if it means 
bringing the Bible into the public school, bring it in; with 
all sincerity, candor, and earnestness, fetch it in." * 

* Elementary School Teacher, vol. vi, pp. 435-436. 



144 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

The part that the emotions play in moral instruction 
should ever be kept before the mind. A moral attitude can- 
not be driven or drilled into the child; the ground must be 
prepared and the mind receptive. It is not the intellectual, 
but the emotional, side of human nature that causes us 
to start and thrill at the sound of the national anthem. 
Herbert Spencer, in discussing national education, has 
this to say: "Whatever moral benefit can be effected by 
education, must be effected by an education which is 
emotional rather than intellectual. If in the place of 
making a child understand that this thing is right and 
the other wrong, you make it feel that they are so if 
you make virtue loved and vice loathed if you arouse a 
noble desire, and make torpid an inferior one if you 
bring into life a previously dormant sentiment if you 
cause a sympathetic impulse to get the better of one that 
is selfish if, in short, you produce a state of mind to 
which proper behavior is natural, spontaneous, instinctive, 
you do some good. But no drilling in catechisms, no 
teaching of moral codes, can effect this." * 

Finally, the purpose of our school work in the cultiva- 
tion of moral standards on the part of the pupil is to help 
each one to see and appreciate his duty to himself and to 
see and appreciate the place he should occupy as regards 
his fellows. 

* Social Statics, pp. 175-176. 



THE BASIS 01- I'.TIIICAL TRAINING 145 

THESES 

1. There is great need for an advance in moral stand- 
ards, both public and private. 

2. Moral training in the early schools and under for- 
mer systems took the form of religious instruction. 

3. " Education is life." The purpose of the school is 
to train all the powers; the pupil must become master of 
himself on his physical, mental, and moral sides. 

4. Moral training can best be brought about through 
a thorough regard for discipline, which is based largely 
upon and determined by the degree of attention given. 
Attention can be secured only as there is a deep and 
satisfying interest promoting it. 

5. Interest must be "many sided." The study of the 
concrete form is essential. The unusual should not be 
resorted to, and pupils must be led to do those things in 
which they may have little interest; otherwise they may 
become one-sided, selfish, and unmindful of the rights of 
others. 

6. Voluntary attention should grow out of the invol- 
untary form; and this may be accomplished largely by 
means of properly graded subject-matter. 

7. Discipline as a problem will be minimized if atten- 
tion and interest are secured. The suggestion of the 
teacher must be implicitly followed. The pupil who is 
not taught to obey cannot be expected to claim obedience 
from others. Obedience should in time be carried over 
into the realm of choice. 

Standards 10 



146 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

8. Since it is so largely upon obedience that the moral 
life of the individual depends, regularity, punctuality 
and courtesy should be insisted upon. The principles of 
morality are not gained from a book or from the spoken 
word simply, but from the unconscious influences; the 
sum total of the associations of the developing mind. 
What is done stands for more than what is said. 

TOPICS FOR STUDY 

1. The school as a moral institution. 

2. The use of the Bible in the school; shall it be used 
for its literary and historic values only ? 

3. Has the church or parochial school a higher moral 
standard than the public school ? Does it succeed better 
than the public school in living up to its ideal ? 

4. Consider fully the tests of moral standards in edu- 
cation. 

5. Are some school studies more ethical in their char- 
acter than are others? 

6. Is it more difficult to interest pupils in a study of 
morals than in other subjects ? 

7. How may the study of strong moral characters, such 
as Lincoln and Garrison, be made most valuable? 

8. Are girls, or boys, the more amenable to discipline? 

9. Is the moral tone of the community where the study 
of morals has a place in the school, higher than it is else- 
where ? 

10. The school surroundings and moral training. 
Which plays the greater part, environment or heredity ? 



THE BASIS OF ETHICAL TRAINING 147 

11. The relation of teacher to parent in matters of 
morals and of discipline. 

12. Devotional exercises in the school. Should the 
pupils take active part and if so, how? What is the 
value of responsive reading? Discuss the advisability of 
having the whole school assemble together for general 
exercises. 

13. Study the question of discipline in the several 
grades of the elementary school. Are teachers agreed that 
there are certain years or grades in which the problem is 
a particularly troublesome one? 

14. Recall a number of groups of children of various 
ages and determine whether the attention generally given 
is of a voluntary or involuntary nature, or whether with 
any given individual the attention is now of one form and 
now of another. 

15. Make a list of those studies or subjects in which you 
now have most interest. Were you interested chiefly in 
these subjects in your elementary school days? Can 
you recall what were the causes that tended to make a 
given study interesting ? 

Was there a change in this respect, the interesting study 
of a given year becoming the uninteresting one of a suc- 
ceeding year and vice versa? Account for this. 

Apply the same tests as above suggested for school 
studies, to matters or subjects entirely without the range 
of the school. 



148 



STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 






CONSULT 

ADAMS Relation of the School Studies to Moral Train- 

ing. Third Yearbook, National Herbart So- 
ciety, p. 73. 

BRUMBAUGH The Making of a Teacher, pp. 25-37; 250-261. 

BUTLER Meaning of Education, particularly pp. 28-31. 

COOLEY Human Nature and the Social Order, chaps. 2 & 

12. 

DE GARMO Social Aspects of Moral Education. Third 
Yearbook, National Herbart Society, p. 35. 

DEWEY Ethical Principles Underlying Education. Third 

Yearbook, National Herbart Society, p. 75. 
School and Society. 

HALL Moral Education and Will Training, Pedagog- 

ical Seminary, vol. n, pp. 72-89. 

HARRIS Report of the Committee of Fifteen The Re- 

lation of School Discipline to Moral Educa- 
tion. Third Yearbook, National Herbart 
" Society, p. 58. 

HERBART Science of Education, pp. 110-120; 200-252. 

JACKMAN Elementary School Teacher, vol. 6, pp. 431-437. 

CALL Present Notions about Ethical Instruction in 

our Public Schools, 75th Annual Proceedings, 
American Institute of Instruction, pp. 61-88. 

MAcCuNN The Making of Character, chap. 6. 

McMuRRY Elements of General Method, chap. 3. 

PARKER Talks on Pedagogics, chaps. 6 & 14. 

SADLER Report on Moral Education in American 

Schools with Special Reference to the For- 
mation of Character. 

THORNDIKE Notes on Child Study, chap. 16. 



CHAPTER VI 
THE SIGNIFICANCE OF HABIT 

HABIT may be defined in terms of character. Cul- 
ture comes through character, and when 
true culture is developed in the schoolroom, 



Element in character is being formed. But this culture 

Character 

or character is to come as right habits are 
rooted and mirrored in action. 

Habits, good or bad, are being formed continually. It 
is a commonplace, but one of which we need 
constantly to remind ourselves, that a thing 



Acquiring once done, an act once accomplished, tends 

Habits 

always to develop a desire to repeat that ac- 
tivity. The act or deed accompanied by painful sensa- 
tions may be more readily inhibited than the one followed 
by feelings of pleasure or joy. The sensation that ac- 
companies the placing of the fingers in the cogs of a 
wheel may be such as to prevent a repetition of the act 
and the formation of the habit of tampering with cogs; 
and thus a restraining habit may be formed. In a more 
purely mental connection, the field and force of habit 
is easily appreciated. The thing once done tends to be 
repeated, and whether physical or mental, the attempt 
is made to explain this from the pathological standpoint. 

149 



150 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

The doing of the thing, the thought process, or the framing 
of an idea, has as its resultant in consciousness 
rmt-fThetry the wearing of a path or the blazing of a trail 
through the brain. Just as a pioneer, thread- 
ing his way through the forest, blazes the trees, that he 
may leave a path by which to retrace his steps, or as the 
vanguard of the engineering corps marks the landscape, 
so are paths made in the brain. When an act is performed 
for the first time, sign posts are set up, which invite and 
impel a repetition. The line of least resistance is over 
a traveled path rather than through an undiscovered 
region. 

All recent authorities on the psychology of habit are 

wont to ascribe to the mental phase a physi- 

The Mental ca j counterpart, and to show the relation be- 

and Physical r 

A Parallel tween habit in the material world and in the 
realm of mentality. Every schoolboy knows 
how disagreeable it is to have a shoe " run over." For 
some reason one side of the shoe is subjected to more 
pressure than the other, and before the indi- 
vidual is aware, he is walking upon the side 



Physical rather than the bottom of the shoe. The 

turning habit in the shoe has been formed, 
subsequent wrinkles and creases appearing in the same 
spots where they first occurred. No end of trouble and 
annoyance is thus occasioned before a normal condition 
is reached ; and perhaps the fault is never remedied. 

Another common illustration of the same principle : 
as you drive, you perceive that a rein has become twisted. 



'////<; SIGNIFICANCE OF HABIT 151 

This may have been brought about by twisting or doubling 
the rein when removing the harness on a previous occa- 
sion. Being now used again, it tenaciously holds to the 
twist, that is, the habit has developed, it being easier for 
the leather to fall into an improper shape than to act the 
part expected of it. 

The acquiring of a habit may be likened to the making 
of a chain. The links are made separately, joined to- 
gether one by one, until the complete chain is formed. 
Each repetition of an act is a link in the chain of habit 
and soon will become part of the life of the individual. 

But while habit is thus built up gradually and logic- 
ally, release from a habit does not come 
Building up readily through the reverse process. The 

vs. Tearing 

down sure way is not to break the links one by 

one, to stop by degrees, to "taper off." In 
rare instances this method may bring results, but the 
way to stop is to stop. Under the great law governing 
education, the little by little process must, perforce, be 
used in acquiring knowledge. To break successfully 
with a habit, however, we must break now, here, at once 
and completely. 

You want your pupils to acquire the habit of standing 

straight, of holding the bodies erect ; you want them to 

enunciate clearly and to write legibly ; you 

Acquired desire that they should be clean and neat in 

Through personal appearance and methodical in their 

manner of doing things ; you demand that 

equity and helpfulness prevail among the classes ; you 



152 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

see the necessity for punctuality and regularity in at- 
tendance ; and you insist that nature as well as books be 
studied. To get into the habit of standing erect, the 
pupil must stand erect ; distinct speech comes habitually 
through clear enunciation ; a legible hand is the result 
of practice that has formed the habit ; to be always neat 
and tidy means constant care in this regard ; proper 
methods, appreciation of the rights of others, the virtue 
of being on time and the love of nature and of books, 
these all come through habits formed and made a part 
of our mental machinery. 

Consider now the reverse order of things, the draw- 
ing away from harmful practices and wrong attitudes. 
Here again habit has played its part. The 
Relation of word or deed you deprecate belongs more and 

the Difficulty 

in Breaking more to the individual as the practice goes on. 
Frequency Habit is becoming stronger and stronger, 
and Length The more frequent the performance of the 

of Perform- 
ance act the more secure becomes the grip of the 

habit Looked at from the standpoint of 
the school, the teacher now has a double task. With a 
free field a desirable habit may be inculcated with com- 
parative ease ; but when a new habit must take the 

place of an old one, then the latter must be 

More Diffi- 
culty to given battle and routed before the former 

ow Habit? can occu Py the ground. Thus the difficulties 
than to ES- are increased. This helping to break up old 

tablish New 

habits and to establish new ones is by no 
means the least duty that falls to the teacher. 



THE SIGNIFICANCE OF HABIT 153 

If, then, a pernicious habit is to be eradicated, if the 
pupil does not use grammatical forms or indulges in un- 
becoming language, if he is selfish or stubborn or lazy, 
if he reads harmful literature or is being injured by his 
fondness for tobacco, if he " cuts " school or cheats in 
his lesson or is otherwise untruthful, he has these habits 
to wipe out before those representing opposite tendencies 
can be substituted. He must eradicate the evil by sub- 
stituting the good. 

Perhaps the greatest aid to one endeavoring to cure 
himself of a bad habit is to keep free from that which 
prompts it. The tendency toward subsequent action be- 
ing so strong, as already shown, it is unwise to stand in 
the way of temptation. The longer time that can elapse 
before the subsequent repetition of a wrong habit, the 
greater likelihood of its complete inhibition. On the 
other hand, a habit to be fixed demands repetition many 
times in one form or another. To repeat, to review, to 
recapitulate, to turn again to the question, all these un- 
der proper conditions, will tend toward habit formation. 

Professor James,* in discussing Professor Bain's max- 
ims on " The Moral Habits," deduces two principles of 
chief importance. Briefly stated they are, 
F^Stef* first the grater the impetus and determina- 
tion with which we throw ourselves into the 
current, the more readily will we acquire a new habit 
or divorce ourselves from the old ; and second, be cer- 

* Psychology, Briefer Course, p. 145; Principles of Psychology, vol. I, 

p. 122. 



154 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

tain the habit is a part of you before you allow a chance 
exception to come upon the stage. To these maxims 
Professor James adds the suggestion that a resolution 
once made, no opportunity should be allowed to pass or 
any emotion to die, without acting toward the desired 
end, that the habit may be established. 

Action in one or another direction is always essential, 
and particularly when a habit is to be broken, or when 
one looks for a means to keep the mind from dwelling 
upon the undesirable. If the pupil is so interested and 
occupied as to rivet his attention upon that 
which is best and highest, he may soon be 
^ en ti re ty to forego former practices or 
tendencies. If the mind is allowed to dwell, 
or focus itself, upon the old habit, it will be an almost 
hopeless task to break away from a fixed tendency. 
Care must be exercised that the pupil is never idle. 
Mind and body should be kept occupied ; and in the 
fulfillment of this necessity is to be seen one of the 
great benefits of industrial education. The mind is 
occupied with the work that the hands are doing, and 
every reformatory as well as every school of industry 
stands as an example of the value of concentrated em- 
ployment. 

Teach the lesson of the significance of habit. En- 
deavor to inculcate in your pupils the desire for right 
habits and the inhibition of bad ones ; and do this even 
at the expense of skipping a few pages in the book. Lead 
them to understand that in business or pleasure, in school 



THE SIGNIFICANCE OF HABIT 155 

or out, in whatever rank or station, trade or profession, 
he only is successful who has subdued or kept down un- 
desirable habits and who has in large measure acquired 
habits of worth. 

THESES 

1. Character is formed and determined by the num- 
ber and quality of one's habits. 

2. The mind is acquiring habits constantly, and the 
more frequently an act is performed the greater likeli- 
hood of its repetition and of a fixed habit resulting. 

3. The pathological, or line of least resistance theory, 
and its parallel in the material world. 

4. Habit-forming vs. habit-breaking, easier to make 
than to mend. 

5. To acquire a desirable habit, launch yourself with 
energy and determination, beware of imitations or excep- 
tions, and take advantage of every opportunity offered to 
clinch the habit. 

TOPICS FOR STUDY 

1. Before the child enters school, certain character- 
istic habits are partially or wholly formed. What are 
the chief ones that the teacher must endeavor to have 
eliminated ? 

2. Should the business of the school be the presenting 
of material such as to form new habits, break bad ones, 
or develop those already maturing ? 

3. Give illustrations of the force and tenacity of habit 



156 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

as shown in the lives and work of those beyond middle 
life. 

4. There are dangers that may arise from carrying a 
wholesome and useful habit too far. What are they, and 
under what conditions does the statement hold ? 

5. Make a list of injurious habits (of which the follow- 
ing are typical), such as the teacher has usually to con- 
tend with in school. Do these same habits exhibit them- 
selves in adults in later life ? Whispering, inattention, 
absence, tardiness, lying, stealing, smoking ; how would 
you proceed in your crusade against these obstacles to 
educational growth ? 

6. Consider the place of corporal punishment in habit- 
breaking. 

7. Compare the value of the use of high moral stand- 
ards as object lessons to be copied, and of illustrations 
drawn from the lower levels of life, the failures, to 
be avoided. 

8. What relation does the term habit bear to automatic 
action and to second nature ? 

9. Under what conditions, if ever, should a trouble- 
some habit be lopped off by degrees instead of being 
broken with instantly ? 

10. The great value of proper habit-forming and the 
dangers from evil habits should be put before school chil- 
dren. Just how far should such discussion go and what 
form should this instruction take ? 

1 1. Compare habit-forming in man with instinct-form- 
ing in animals. 



THE SIGNIFICANCE OF HABIT 



157 



12. At what age do you find children most likely to 
inhibit bad habits and form good ones ? 

13. Read the chapter on habit in James's Psychology 
and write a page on the meaning of habit in education. 

14. Investigate the biological view of habit and write 
a clear statement of this conception. 

CONSULT 

ANGEL Psychology, pp. 51-63. 

BOWNE Introduction to Psychological Theory, pp. 301- 

3 o6. 

BRYAN The Basis of Practical Teaching, chap. 5. 

HALLECK Education of the Central Nervous System, 

pp. 222-237. 

HAMILTON Mental Science, pp. 191-194. 
HORNE Psychological Principles of Education, chap. 26. 

JAMES Psychology, Briefer Course, chap. 10. 

Principles of Psychology. 

Talks to Teachers. 

ROWE Physical Nature of the Child, chaps. 10 & n. 

ROYCE Outlines of Psychology, chaps. 3, 8, 9 & 10. 

SEELEY Elementary Pedagogy, chap. 10. 

STOUT Manual of Psychology, pp. 99-101. 

SULLY The Human Mind, vol. n, pp. 224-233. 

THORNDIKE Elements of Psychology, chap. 13. 

Principles of Teaching, chap. 8. 



CHAPTER VII 
THE CURRICULUM IN OPERATION 

SOME years ago I visited Stratford, the home of the 
Master Poet, that I might receive at first hand the in- 
spiration and enthusiasm breathed from that historic 
environment. I chanced to arrive on market day and 
had no difficulty in finding upon the street a young lad 
who volunteered to show me about. In the course of our 
conversation I said to him: 

" How old are you?" 
He replied, " Fourteen years, sir." 
"Have you ever visited London?" I asked. 
"No, sir." 

"Ever visited Manchester?" 
"No, sir." 

"Leamington?" (eight miles distant) 
"No, sir." 

"Do you ever expect to go?" 
"I don't know, sir." 

"How much did you make last year showing people 
about?" 

"I took four pounds, sir." 

Some will tell you that the fourteen year old boy who 
had never been beyond the borders of his own village and 
whose outlook was thus circumscribed, was not being 

158 



Till': CURRICULUM IN OPERATION 159 

truly educated, even though he was familiar with his 
Caesar and could recite the terms of the Magna Charta; 
that a knowledge of people and things, of places and 
events, of methods employed in carrying on the complex 
existence of to-day is essential and cannot be had within 
such a narrow world as that which the boy occupied. 

Only recently I chanced to be so seated in a railway 
car as to overhear a conversation between two ladies. 
One traveler remarked proudly to her companion that 
a certain boy had neither missed a day at school nor 
been tardy in two years. As I pondered the matter, I 
questioned if after all this was something of which to 
be proud; if the education of this American boy, with 
broader knowledge, perhaps, than that possessed by the 
young English lad was such as to warrant one in taking 
particular pride that no absent or tardy marks had been 
recorded against his name in two years. And then I fell 
to thinking of the statement made by one of our most 
eminent school men, extreme though it be, that he thanks 
his lucky stars his own attendance at school was for a 
period not exceeding one year all told. 

For those who hold to the doctrine of formal discipline, 
it matters not so much what one is taught. 
Whatever is studied tends to develop the 



Min<* Devei- mind, to so discipline the self, the individual, 

opment 

as to render him able to grapple successfully 
with the problems that confront him in later life. Then, 
too, according to another view, the child must pur- 
sue all branches of school knowledge since he is to be 



160 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

developed in an all-around manner. Especially must he 
taste of all courses in the curriculum, it 

Danger in 

Early spe- being impossible to tell, at an early age, 
wnat tra ^e, vocation, or profession he is to fol- 
i ow While this is an age of specialization, the 

all Subjects 

real specialist must first be a good generahst; 

hence, to avoid narrow and superficial specialization, and 

to be prepared for any emergency that may present itself, 

each child while in school must go through the same mill. 

That the child cannot pursue all lines of study, cannot 

make himself master of, or even taste of, all 
view^hlt branches of knowledge in one lifetime is 
child can evident. No doubt there are certain things 
Knowledge taught in schools that should be taught to all. 

But as it has been so aptly put by another, 
" First things first." Perhaps there are many things not 
taught in schools to-day that should have a place on the 
program. Give first consideration to the essentials. 

Colonel Parker says: "Knowledge is boundless, and 
your pupils can get but a drop of the ocean. What knowl- 
edge shall you present them in the years you have them 
under your care and guidance? What knowledge shall 
govern you in the selection? The answers are not far 
to seek. Your selection can be entirely governed by what 
each pupil needs for his personal development. He needs 
that knowledge which will enable him best to serve the 
school and the world. The two answers are one; the 
needs of the school and the needs of the world are the 
needs of the individual. A course of study is a means to 



Till': CURRICULUM IN OPERATION 161 

an end. From this course of study the teacher selects the 
matt-rial immediately necessary for the advancement of 
personal, mental and moral power." 

The curriculum must be such that the character, the 
form, the ideals of the life at school shall not differ from, 
nor run counter to, those of actual life, and unless the 
school is recognized as being in accord with the broader 
truths of existence, as a part of real life and not a prepara- 
tion merely for something that is vague and indefinite; 
unless it deals with the actual rather than with the arti- 
ficial, then is the pupil being cheated of his heritage and 
dwarfed and warped in his growth. 

The school of fifty years ago considered in too narrow 

a sense, perhaps, the so-called practical side 

schooilnd f education. To teach the pupil to read, 

the New; a to write, and to cipher, was then considered 

Contrast 

to be the chief duty of the school from the 
intellectual side. Minor emphasis, was, to be sure, placed 
upon a study of the main facts in history, of the geography 
of the earth, of spelling. The pupil was taught also to 
parse and conjugate. While with the glamour attaching 
to the school of our fathers there is much of sentiment, 
as seen through the hazy atmosphere of a lifetime, and 
while we are apt to magnify the value of work given in 
"the good old days," we admit the worth of the educa- 
tion of the past and the part it has played in helping to 
shape the lives of those who have built the nation. We 
must admit also that in the earlier days much energy was 
wasted by the pupils, energy that might have been turned 

Standards 1 1 



162 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

to good advantage. Certain it is that if the school of the 
past was born of earlier ideals and was suited to the 
earlier day, the civilization of the present demands an 
entirely different type of school. 

Subjects have from time to time crept in to enrich, or 
at least to help fill, the program. Spelling is now taught 
both as an oral and as a written exercise, geography and 
history are studied with regard to effect as well as to 
cause; and the elements of the sciences and of nature 
study, music, elocution, drawing, clay modeling, physical 
culture, and the many forms of hand work, have, one 
after another, been added to the curriculum. 

In arranging our courses of study we must have in mind 
the needs and conditions of the individual student, so plan- 
ning the work that there shall be constant reference to the 
pupil's capacity and to his life after leaving the school. 
The curriculum must grow out of experience and since cir- 
cumstances and the individual teacher must largely deter- 
mine details, what follows should be used as suggestive only. 

In enumerating the subjects that may properly be com- 
prised in the elementary school curriculum, 
J do not nave in mmd the correlation of 



ciassmca- studies, in the loose sense of the common 

tion of 

studies usage of that term. I am thinking rather 

of those particular subjects, considered in a 
broad sense, that go to make up the everyday life of the 
child of primary grade. I am thinking of a group of sub- 
jects that should compel his attention because of their 
constant action and interaction about him, subjects that 



/ /IK CURRICULUM IN OPERATION 163 

furnish the material for his everyday experiences, and 
by and through which he is constantly expressing him- 
self, subjects that assist him to interpret the great world 
of life and action and through which he in turn interprets 
to others. The classification is: 

1. Physical Training. 

2. Oral and Written Expression, Reading, Language 
and Literature. 

3. History. 

4. The Industrial Arts. 

5. Geography and Nature Study. 

6. Music. 

7. Numbers. 

This classification does not carry with it the complete 
breaking up of the curriculum into seven distinct and 
clear-cut bodies of subject-matter. Indeed all subjects 
may finally be reduced to one, the study of life itself. 
The subjects of instruction, as presented in this seven- 
fold classification, should comprehend all that it is essential 
to teach the pupil of primary grade. The subjects are not 
divided sharply, the one from the other, since physical 
training, for instance, may find a place in the class in 
music; and expression, whether oral or written, properly 
should be taught throughout the entire group. Then, too, 
subjects frequently given a special place in the program, 
spelling, for example, will be taught where and under 
such circumstances as may seem most fitting, according 
to the necessities of a given situation. 

The working out of an elementary school curriculum 



1 64 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

is a matter to be treated in a subsequent volume. In the 
present chapter will be found suggestions on teaching 
only two of the seven school subjects, physical training 
and the industrial arts. It has been deemed wise to make 
brief reference to these subjects here, not only on account 
of their great worth and because they are indispensable 
to the complete growth of the pupil, but also, owing to 
the very nature and newness of the subjects themselves, 
because few teachers are so conversant with them as to 
be able to present them to classes. 

(a) PHYSICAL TRAINING 

By physical training I mean all forms of bodily activity 
that look toward healthful exercise, whether 
workcfom carried on under the name of gymnastics, 
prehended calisthenics, physical culture, Delsarte, ath- 
letics, recreation exercises, or any other title; 
whether the work be Swedish system or German system; 
whether given in a gymnasium under a special teacher, or 
in the grade room by the grade teacher; whether listed in 
the program as a regular subject, or introduced by the 
teacher at a point where relaxation and change of occu- 
pation and position are necessary. 
I am convinced that physical training and athletics are 
of vital import in both elementary and sec- 

The Demand i 11 -r-r i -, 

for Physical ondary schools. Had I the temerity to clas- 
Traimngin s jf v the school studies upon a relative value 

Schools 

basis, I am not sure but that the development 
of the body toward healthy, vigorous, physical activity, 



THE CURRICULUM IN OPERATION 165 

would stand out as occupying first place. Even the in- 
culcation of moral standards depends in no small measure 
upon the physical nature, and certainly when dealing with 
gra.k- pupils, physical training must take its place side 
by side with those essential humanities, typified by music 
and oral expression. 

The time has long since past when to be educated 
implies frail physique and scant health. Time was when 
palp cheeks and stooped shoulders were synonymous with 
culture and learning. To become educated was to for- 
swear the vulgar occupations of life. A peculiar con- 
struction indeed was placed upon those lines "For 'tis 
the mind that makes the body rich." We are coming to 
see, more and more, that the sound mind in the sound 
body is a condition more to be sought than that of the 
sound mind in the unsound body, and that the first-named 
condition is much more easily realized than the second. 

We shall agree, I think, upon the necessity for, and the 
value of, physical training in school. If such 
*ecessityfor training is to perform in any adequate man- 
zation ner its full function, it must be systematized. 

Systematization implies supervision. By sys- 
tematization I do not mean uniformity or over-curriculari- 
zation. Physical training in school must be worked out 
upon the basis of relative values, and taught, not as busy 
work, but as a well-defined subject. The work must not 
appear as abstract exercises but as concrete problems. 
In schools where the pupils have the advantage afforded 
by a well-equipped gymnasium, and what is of more 



i66 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

importance, a well-equipped teacher, the problem is not 

so difficult. It is, however, in the grade 

Problems school where there is no gymnasium, no 

Confronting 

theun- special room to which the pupils may be 

school 6 * taken for physical training, that we find our 
serious problem. The nature of the course 
of study, the pressure of other tasks, the unprepared 
condition of the teacher, and too often, a lack of sympathy 
in the work, all conspire to render the physical training 
a neglected subject. 

The aisles between the seats, while narrow, are usually 
of such width as to allow for certain free 
movements of the arms and head and even 



carrying on o f the legs, so far as bending the knees is 
concerned. In comparatively small classes, 
the pupils may be so arranged as not to hamper one 
another in their movements. The prime object of the 
exercises during study time, is to counteract the evil 
effects resulting from unhealthful bodily positions, from 
stooping of the shoulders and cramping of the chest. 
The mere fact of allowing pupils to straighten up is in 
itself essential and is a rest. Elaborate groups of exer- 
cises are not so important as that the pupils be permitted 
a supply of fresh air, and be taught to breathe properly 
so that the lungs may be filled. 

Movements of the hands, the arms, the head, the trunk, 
the legs and feet may be carried on in the aisles. Other 
exercises may be taken in halls or passageways, prefer- 
ably in the open air, if the weather will permit and the 



Til/': CURRICULUM IN OPERATION 167 

distance be not too great. If a hall or passageway is at 
the disposal of the class, wands, dumb-bells and Indian 
clubs may be used. Walking and running exercises are 
particularly good; and the proper breathing exercises 
should always accompany them. 

The time for change and recreation will of course vary. 

Since, however, it is well-nigh impossible to 

Questions of pn ve o ther than class instruction, the teacher 

Administra- 
tion must have a specific time in the day, both 

forenoon and afternoon, perhaps, to give to 
physical training. This is particularly true when dealing 
with primary pupils. If a special time is given on the 
program for such drill, care must be exercised that it be 
sufficiently long before or after the lunch or intermission 
hour. If one room or hallway is used by several grades, 
each class making use of the same equipment, then the 
program must be so adjusted as to prevent conflicts. 
Loose, comfortable clothing and full deep breathing 

must be carefully looked to by the teacher. 

co y n g ditk,n 8 Hi g h collars and ti g ht belts are a hindr ance 

to breathing. A few moments of well-planned 

work is all that is necessary at any one time. The teacher 

himself must be master of all the work he attempts to 

give. He must not ask the pupils to per- 

The Teacher form exercises that he cannot himself accom- 

of the work plish. He must study the subject as he would 

study the history or English lessons, that he 

may have at his command such exercises as are needed 

at a particular time. This statement bears out what was 



168 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

said earlier regarding the systematizing of the work. It 
must not be haphazard. 

I am, of course, alive to the objection that will be raised 

by some at this point. In dealing with young 

andDirec- n pupils, it will be affirmed, physical exercise 

tionare w iil come spontaneously. Furnish the im- 

Necessary . 

petus or rather the proper conditions for exer- 
cise and the pupils will naturally engage in the correct 
bodily movements. This is doubtless true within certain 
limits, but as well say, however, that a child can be taught 
to study by placing a book in his hand and enjoining him 
to study. Undirected effort on the part of the pupils 
results, in this instance, in what we find every day, girls 
and boys in high schools, yes, and the majority of those 
around us in the grown-up world, who have never learned 
the real art of study. Direction and supervision must be 
given physical training and athletics to make them effective. 
If apparatus be used, whether hi the school or in the 

gymnasium, the lighter forms or work are 
overstrain preferable. Pupils should be given a thorough 
Avoided physical examination, to ascertain their needs 

and weaknesses, before they are permitted to 
engage in heavy work calling for exertion or strain. It 
happens frequently that the discovery is made too late, 
that a certain form of exercise indulged in has had the 
effect of tearing down rather than of building up the con- 
stitution. This brings us to the athletic side of our sub- 
ject, athletics being included under the heading, physical 
training. In athletics and heavy gymnastic work, super- 



THE CURRICULUM IN OPERATION 169 

vision is especially necessary and such supervision should 
be scientific, close and careful. 

The athletic side of physical training may be classified 
under two heads. Under one of these will 

Do^bie^cias ^ most * ^ wor ^ now being given in the 
siflcation grades, and some of that given in the high 

school as well, both in and out of doors, and 
in the gymnasium, if one is provided. Such work is likely 
to be of a general nature, and we may call it general 
athletics. Over against this we find certain grade work 
and practically all of that given in the high school at the 
present time falling in a class which we shall speak of as 
competitive or professional athletics. 
The work spoken of as general should be general in the 

sense that all students participate in one or 
Argument another phase of exercise. It is not enough 

for General 

Athletics that certain select students take part. All 
must have the advantage of the training of- 
fered. Here we have one of the strong arguments against 
competitive forms of athletics in the grades. Even in the 
elementary school the games that are competitive in char- 
acter are put upon such a professional basis, and so very 
few take part in them, that the true element of sport 
is eliminated. The fact that only a small number can 
ever hope to qualify for or serve upon any 
AtSetfcs team (that is, be permitted to play in con- 
Means spe- tests), owing to the vast amount of practice 

cialization 

and technique necessary, excludes the great 
mass of boys; and they suffer in consequence. This goes 



170 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

to prove the necessity for some form of supervision that 
shall make it possible for all to be benefited. As a matter 
of fact, the very ones who are by nature and training 
fitted to enter competitive feats are those who least need 
athletic work in the school. The moral effects of the pro- 
fessionalizing of athletics is peculiarly bad. In general 
forms of work, such as track and field athletics, the re- 
sults are much less objectionable. The other school work 

suffers when the pupil engages in competitive 
Sting* fwm or professional forms of athletics; and what- 
Professionai- ever effect this may have upon college boys, 

it is not to be desired in the elementary or 
high school student. Not only is a disproportionate 
amount of time necessary in such training, to the end that 
the other school work suffers unduly in consequence, but 
the mind of the student is so continuously upon his game 
as to render him incapable of concentrating upon anything 
outside of it. Then, too, so much stress is laid upon 
winning, that trickery and dishonesty are, in some quar- 
ters, the rule rather than the exception. 

In order to bring out more clearly this matter of the 
danger of over-emphasizing in competitive athletics, and 
the necessity for careful supervision, note the following 
facts. The data were not gathered through the use of 
a set of brass instruments, but come directly through 
the teachers who have had to do with the students in 
question. The data cover the entire school year, and 
the boys whose cases are cited were under a consid- 
erable degree of supervision, so that those situated 



THE CURRICULUM IN OPERATION 171 

less fortunately would not appear to as good advan- 
tage. 

The records of sixty-two high school boys are shown. 
Twenty-one of the sixty-two engaged in some 
form of track athletics; twenty-five in football; 
anc * n ^ neteen m baseball. There are three 
letics, Base- duplicates. Upon these pupils eleven teach- 
FootbaJj ers rc P ort > being an average of five and five- 

tenths reports for each student. As symbols 
indicative of the quality of work done, the sign + (plus) 
means high; G, signifies good; M, medium, and (minus), 
low or failed. I count all signs after a letter, such as 
M , at the full value of the letter, thus giving the pupil 
the advantage. There are four chances to one that a 
given student will be M or G rather than M-f- or 
G+. In percentages, M is 75; G 75 to 85; and + in- 
cludes all markings above 85; while a student is low or 
fails, according as his record varies below 75. The three 
following tables show the standing of the entire sixty-two : 

Scholarship and Deportment Records Combined 
Percentage of students Record 

9-74% + 

39.87% G 

28.70% M 

22.52% - 

Scholarship Record Only 

Percentage of students Record 

6.07% + 

26.52% G 

38.00% M 

29-39% - 



172 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

Deportment Record Only 

Percentage of students Record 
20.47% + 

30-95% + G 

26.66% + M 

21.76% - 

Note that the chances are nearly i to 4 that a student 
will be in class standing or deportment, when the two 
are taken together, and 3 to 10 that he will be in class 
standing alone. Note also that the + record in class 
standing is lowered when the deportment is not included. 

The two following tables show the standing of the 
twenty-one boys who engaged in 

Track and Field Athletics 
Scholarship: 11.60% -f (Approximately one in 

45 - 53% G nine are ni g h -) 

29.46% M 

13 . 39% (Approximately one in 

seven are low or have 

failed.) 

Deportment: 19.29% -f (i to 5) 

62.28% G 

I2.28%....M 

6.14%....- (i to 16) 

Notice here that the class record for - - students is 
13.39% for track, as against 29.38% for all athletics. 



THE CURRICULUM IN OPERATION 173 

The odds arc twice as great that a failure will result when 
considering football or baseball, as when considering field 
alone. The chances are 3$ to i in favor of track 
boys as against the combined work, that a failure will be 
made. 

Baseball 

Scholarship: 2 . 53% + (i to 40) 

17.94%. ...G 

37.97%. ...M 
40.50% (2 to 5) 

Deportment: 7.31% + (i to 14) 

51.21%. ...G 
18.29%.. ..M 
23.17%....- (i to 4) 

It will be seen that the record of for track students 
was 13.39%; f r baseball, it was 40.50%, or a probability 
of 3 to i that the baseball student ranges lower than the 
field student. The chances of deportment are i to 16 
in track, and i to 4 in baseball. The figures show 29.46% 
M in track, and 45.53% G; as against 18.29% M in 
baseball, and 51.21% G. 

Football 

Scholarship: 3 . 05% -f (i to 33) 

13.94%.... G 
43.50%. ...M 

39.69%....- (2 to 5) 



174 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

Deportment: 9.37% + (i to 10) 

44.53%.... G 
26.55%. ...M 

19.53%....- (i to 5) 

The probability of in scholarship for football and 
baseball boys is the same, 2 to 5; in track events it is i to 7, 
meaning that nearly three chances exist for work among 
football as against track boys. In deportment there is 
practically no difference. There is only one chance in 
four in favor of a + mark with football, as compared 
with track students. 

In football only one boy out of every four is M in de- 
portment, and less than half are G. In baseball, one out 
of every five is M and every other one G, while in field 
events one out of every seven is M and three-fourths are G. 
The standards of scholarship are lower in football, there 
being only one-third of the number of good students that 
ate found in track athletics and only seven-ninths as many 
as in baseball. 

An added significance is given these statistics when it 
is understood that the records of the majority of the base- 
ball and football students was considerably higher during 
the months preceding and immediately following their 
extensive practice than while under training. 

What has all this to do with supervision ? It has every- 
thing to do with it. No one will contend that athletics are 
not essential to the best development of the elementary 
and high school lad. The showing I have made, how- 



THE CURRICULUM IN OPERATION 175 

cvi-r, is probably much better than would be found the 
country over. 

Our athletics must be so supervised that we shall: 

First, provide some form of physical training for 
each pupil in the school, and, second, present work that 
shall increase rather than diminish the standards of effi- 
ciency in scholarship, and .raise instead of lower moral 
ideals. 

While investigating this topic in England, some years 
ago, I was told by competent authority that competitive 
athletics, particularly football, was the life of Oxford and 
Cambridge. That to exclude football, as some suggested, 
would result in the certain decline of these universities. 
Be that as it may, there are those of us who believe that 
the business of our American elementary and high schools 
is to produce men and women of mental efficiency and 
moral stability, as well as those of strong physique, and 
we propose to do our part, though professionalism be 
barred from our schools; and we insist upon conscien- 
tious supervision of athletics by those who know the 
dangers into which young students are easily led. 

It is the business of the teacher then to see that the 
best possible conditions are present, looking 
toward the physical welfare of the pupils. 



for Good The following suggestions are offered: 

First, the size and height of the seat must 
be adjusted to the pupil that he may not be cramped in 
his work. 
Second, side and cross lights must be excluded from 



176 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

the room; the light should enter from above or fall over 
the left shoulder. 

Third, an abundance of pure air (cold air is not neces- 
sarily pure), especially when the pupils are engaging in 
physical exercise, is an essential. 

Fourth, to counteract bad bodily positions and give 
change and rest to the student, a carefully planned and 
worked-out series of light gymnastic exercises is desirable, 
attention being given to proper breathing. 

Out of door gymnastics or games will result most bene- 
ficially to the student and to the conduct of 
influence of ^ sc hooL if the teacher enters heartily into 

the Teacher . 

in the Games the spirit of the exercise. He need not, nor 
should he, dominate or dictate in the sports, 
but the personality of the teacher is as necessary out of 
doors as it is in the class room. He can suggest such 
sports and exercises as he thinks most beneficial at a 
given time, being cautious lest he rob the pupils of the 
power of initiative; he can offer advice in case of dis- 
putes, lend judgment where a decision is needed, or serve 
as arbitrator where serious factional differences arise. 
Moreover, upon the playground as nowhere else, may 
the teacher find his opportunity to study each individual 
pupil, to learn his likes and dislikes, his strengths and 
weaknesses, and in no place better than in games de- 
manding physical endurance and manual skill, can the 
lessons of honor, of equity, and of kindness be inculcated. 
Much more attention should be given physical training 
than it is receiving in the schools to-day; and not only 



THE CURRICULUM IN OPERATION 177 

should it occupy more of the school time, but more 
serious consideration must be given to the kinds of work 
undertaken. 

(b) THE INDUSTRIAL ARTS 

Having dealt in a previous chapter with the theory and 
purpose of the industrial arts, it will only be necessary 
to suggest here some of the ways in which the various 
materials of the manual training room may be used 
throughout the elementary school. 

Clay Modeling, Tiles, Pottery 

It is not at all likely that the average teacher will over- 
emphasize the value of clay work. The clay, though 
easily handled, at the same time offers sufficient resistance 
to bring into use the more fundamental muscles. It 
makes for freedom of expression in a variety of ways; it 
lends itself to form appreciation (the three dimensions), 
and it develops an appreciation of lines of beauty and 
correct conceptions of space relations. The study of 
animal and plant forms, topography, history, customs, 
occupations, the development of art, ideas of building 
construction all are made more effective through the use 
of clay modeling and pottery. Many industries may be 
taken up in a simple way in connection with the work, 
thus bringing the pupils nearer to the life of the primitive 
peoples and leading to an appreciation of the advances 
that have been made. 

In clay work the process involved is mainly that of build- 
ing up and is thus constructive rather than destructive. 

Standards 12 



178 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

In order to prepare clay properly ,for use in the class 
room, some sort of a trough or a tub is necessary. One 
can be made readily; a heavy packing box of convenient 
size and shape can be obtained; or a small fiber or gal- 
vanized iron tub may be purchased. If a wooden box 
is used, it should be zinc lined. The clay may be had 
dry from the potters' works or from a kindergarten supply 
house. Place the clay in a tub with about one-third its 
volume of water. After standing thus for several hours, 
it should be thoroughly mixed with the hands, squeezing 
out all lumps. If, when well mixed, it is found to be too 
dry to work easily, that is, if the surface cracks when 
being molded in the hands, add a little water, remix and 
mold into balls of convenient size. If too wet when 
mixed, a little new, dry clay may be added, and thor- 
oughly worked into the mass until it sticks but slightly to 
the hands. 

The great objection raised to the use of clay is that it 
must be handled again and again and is thus rendered 
uncleanly. Where practicable, it would be well to have 
the clay used once only, although there is scant proof that 
clay, properly treated, is injurious to the skin. Its greatest 
point of disadvantage has been the tendency to soil desk 
and books, and the difficulty in keeping and preparing 
it for use. 

Basketry and Weaving 

Weaving and textile work is well adapted to the ele- 
mentary grades. The materials are large, and detail is not 



THE CURRICULUM IN OPERATION 179 

demanded in simple forms. Opportunity is furnished 
for the construction of a crude loom, thus making possible 
not only the weaving of rugs or blankets, but the study 
of more complex machinery adapted to the same purpose. 
Because it is a material used, cotton fiber or wool should 
be studied and its development traced from the raw state 
through the various processes to the completed article. 
A splendid basis of comparison between old and new 
methods is furnished the pupil. 

Through the study of weaving, whether in dealing with 
a basket or a blanket, the child is enabled to reach back 
into the past, note the progress that has been made, and 
appreciate to some extent his position in the present. 

Rushes, flags, willows, coarse yarns, rags, raffia, reeds, 
splints, all are well suited for elementary work. Where 
they can be obtained, the sweet grasses used by the In- 
dians are very desirable. Through the making of useful 
forms the pupil's initiative is developed, and almost all 
phases of school work can be touched upon, and thus 
many industries and occupations become understandable. 
Children should be encouraged to collect such native 
material as may be found in the vicinity of the home or 
school, care being taken not to confine the processes too 
closely to the making of baskets, as many other articles 
of use may be produced. 

In this work is found a good basis for the teaching of 
design, as here the more fundamental principles may be 
learned and applied. Space breaking and filling; the 
meaning of balance, harmony and rhythm as applied to 



i8o 



STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 



line, form and tone; composition and space and form 
relations, all may be taken up and made clear. 

Paper and Cardboard 

These materials, in whatever form, are easily obtain- 
able and quite inexpensive. If properly handled there is 
very little waste. They, too, are easy of manipulation, 
although the work may be made such as to tax the physical 
abilities sufficiently. 

Paper and cardboard may be put to a variety of uses 
in the making of useful articles. Their character renders 
them clean and tidy, and hence applicable for use in any 
schoolroom or at home. They may be manipulated, also, 
in a greater or less degree, by any grade teacher. 

In the use of these materials graphic art has a strong 
place. Objects must be thought out, planned and de- 
signed, thus bringing in the constructional side of drawing 
as well as free sketching. Through the study of form, of 
ornamental design, a feeling for the artistic is developed. 
Color blending and harmony, so essential and attractive 
to young pupils, is largely assisted through the selection 
and arrangement of materials. 

In the first and second grades, the folding, cutting and 
pasting, should as formerly have a place, but to my mind 
a less important one. Weaving with paper need not be 
so prominent, since we have other and more natural media 
for this purpose. Folding of flat forms to produce geo- 
metrical shapes, square, oblong, etc.; cutting and pasting 
of designs; color blending; free cutting from manila or 



THE CURRICULUM IN OPERATION 181 

detail papers, of forms such as animals, natural objects, 
fruits, and doll's clothing; cutting, folding and pasting to 
produce play- or doll-house furniture, chairs, table, cra- 
dle, bed; making of envelopes, valentines, boxes, tags and 
labels; these are some of the ways in which the work 
may be carried on in the lower grades. 

In the second year more difficult pieces of furniture 
may be constructed from heavy manila paper, and light- 
weight cover stock may in some cases be used to produce 
special individual projects for use at home or at school, 
wall-pockets, cornucopias, clock faces, note-paper covers, 
calendar backs, seed envelopes, weather charts and flags, 
wind gauges, etc. It will be seen, then, that the field 
offered in these grades is mainly that of illustration or 
representation, such processes being given attention as 
will assist in the social phases of the child's existence. 

The opportunities are greater and the limitations are 
less when dealing with third and fourth grades, than else- 
where in school, perhaps. Here we have an extended 
field for the making of typical objects of beauty and of 
use. The pupils can deal with the more substantial 
cover papers and the light-weight bristol boards or tag 
stocks, while the age and ability of the boys and girls here 
represented, would, for the most part, prohibit them from 
engaging in some of the more heroic hand-work processes. 
In these grades, also, the work may be illustrative when 
opportunity offers; house construction, parts of utensils, 
small apparatus and machines for nature study. In 
schools where a somewhat varied equipment is found, a 



182 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

variety of work may be done, cutting, mounting and 
filing of pictures for class work, making trays for speci- 
mens, boxes for the pupil's belongings at home or at 
school, picture frames of various forms and decoration, 
napkin rings, calendar backs and supports, memorandum 
and program cards, portfolios for school exercises, en- 
velopes, note-box covers, handkerchief cases, etc. These 
are a few in the multiplicity of objects that offer them- 
selves and afford almost endless variety in design. Here 
there is a constant opportunity for the study of color 
blending in the selection of materials, for representation 
through drawings, for the conservation of material, and 
for appreciation of the artistic in form and proportion. 

In grades above the fourth, the work may be in ad- 
vance of that already spoken of. In addition, heavier 
cover and bristol stocks, and rice, straw and pulp boards 
of various weights can be introduced. The rice or straw 
boards are perhaps better suited to some work than is the 
pulp board, as they do not soil readily. These materials 
are quite substantial, many objects constructed from 
them serving their purpose as fully as though made from 
wood. Here again simple and cheap apparatus to be 
used in connection with the natural science work and 
mathematics can be designed and made. Useful and 
artistic objects, if presenting a dull and uninteresting 
surface, may be covered with lithograph, embossed or 
fancy paper, thus producing a finished effect. In the 
selection of these papers, which are of a variety of design, 
a considerable degree of taste is developed. Heavier and 



7 '///; CURRICULUM IN OPERATION 183 

more serviceable articles, some of them of the same nature 
as those made in previous grades, may be mentioi 
picture and mirror frames; boxes with hinged covers and 
permanent fastenings for paper, envelopes, gloves, etc.; 
note- and text-book covers; bill, letter and picture files; 
scrapbooks and card cases; portfolios for drawings, writ- 
ten exercises and photographs. This work will lead to 
elementary book binding, which will not be touched upon 
here. 

Metal Work: Bent Iron, Metal Spinning, Copper and 
Brass Work 

The metal processes should find a place in the upper 
grades only. Bent ironwork offers large opportunities 
for design, although from an industrial or commercial 
standpoint it has little value. Candlesticks, picture 
frames, knife rests and lamp shades are suggestive of the 
use to which bent iron may be put. In dealing with the 
metal crafts, the way is open for the application of art 
principles. Boxes, caskets, cups, bowls, vases; the de- 
signing, shaping and making of locks, fastenings and 
hinges; articles made in combination with wood or leather: 
these processes may well find a place in the higher grades. 

Wood 

In a previous chapter (Purpose of the Industrial Arts), 
suggestions were made as to the woodwork processes 
applicable in the elementary school. Simple and useful 
articles may be made with few tools in the regular grade 



184 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

room, the desk tops being provided with some sort of 
cover, such as is desirable for cardboard work. Cutting 
in thin wood and whittling with the knife may be carried 
on to some extent, while rough construction, such as the 
making of utensils, tools, furniture and illustrative ma- 
terial may have a place in the lower grades under the 
regular teacher. Bench work proper should not be given 
below the fifth grade. It is properly confined in most 
localities to the seventh and eighth grades. 

In general it may be said that the thoroughly qualified 
teacher will prepare a course of work, adapted as nearly 
as may be to the needs of his students. He will then 
make this course so elastic as to meet the requirements 
of the individual pupil, allowing full play for initiative 
and for the designing and construction of such articles 
as may be for the best interests of the individual. 

THESES 

1. It is a fallacious doctrine that holds that the child 
should be expected to master or even taste of all branches 
of knowledge. 

2. Much sentiment attaches to the education of time 
past; it had points of vantage over that of the present day, 
but would not at all fit present needs and conditions. 

3. The basis for a rational course of study would seem 
to include 

(1) Physical Training. 

(2) Oral and Written Expression, Reading, Language 

and Literature. 



THE CURRICULUM IN OPERATION 185 

(3) History. 

(4) The Industrial Arts. 

(5) Geography and Nature Study. 

(6) Music. 

(7) Numbers. 

4. A strong body is one of the chief elements of a com- 
plete education, and all schools should give attention to 
physical training. 

5. The problems of the equipped and of the unequipped 
school, and suggestions made on meeting and solving 
them. 

6. Absolute necessity for careful supervision and ad- 
ministration of the work. 

7. A comparison drawn between athletics for general 
purposes and the more restricted competitive or pro- 
fessional form. 

8. Comparative data as to scholarship of students en- 
gaging in football, baseball, and field and track athletics. 

9. Practical suggestions on the place of the Industrial 
Arts and the application of the various media, clay, 
textiles, weaving materials, paper and cardboard, metal, 
wood. 

TOPICS FOR STUDY 

1. Apply the familiar phrase, "Good old days," to the 
schools of our grandfathers and determine its force and 
significance in this connection. 

2. Trace the growth of the curriculum in the United 
States during the last fifty years. 



186 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

3. Total up the advantages offered in school to the 
city bred boy and the country boy; the opportunities 
offered outside the school. 

4. Study the curricula of ten typical school systems in 
cities of 25,000 to 100,000 population, taking each of the 
eight grades in turn, and determine the amount of time 
given each of the seven divisions of study as listed on 
page 163. Show: 

(1) Number of minutes per week devoted to each 

subject in each grade. (Same for each city 
chosen.) 

(2) Total number of minutes per week devoted in 

all grades, to each separate subject. 

(3) Total number of minutes in all grades in ten 

cities combined, and arrange seven subjects in 
order of amount of time given. 

5. Consider the advantages and disadvantages of hav- 
ing special teachers in physical training, manual training, 
music, drawing, domestic science, domestic art. The 
advantages and disadvantages of having this work done 
by the regular teachers. 

6. Should the competitive idea as applied to school 
studies and activities have an increasing or a decreasing 
place as the child progresses in school? 

Compare our own schools in this regard with those of 
England, Germany and France. 

7. What is the relation between a closer supervision of 
school tasks on the part of the teacher and the elimination 
of personality on the part of the student ? 



THE CURRICULUM IN OPERATION 



187 



CONSULT 

BARRY The Hygiene of the School Room, chap. 14. 

CHAMBERLAIN, Course of Study in Geography. 
J. F. How We Are Clothed. 

How We Are Fed. 
How We Are Sheltered. 
How We Travel. 

CRAPSY Some Phases of the Curriculum of the Ele- 

mentary School. Proceedings N. E. A., 
i95> PP- 374-38o. 
GORDY A Broader Elementary Education, pp. 212- 

289. 
HALLECK Education of the Central Nervous System, 

chap. ii. 
JACKMAN The Curriculum. Elementary School 

Teacher, vol. 5, pp. 597-665. 

KERN Industrial Training Most Practical and Best 

Suited to the Country Child. Proceed- 
ings, Department Superintendence, N. E. 
A., 1906, pp. 174-178. 
Among Country Schools. 

KEYES Industrial Training best Adapted to City 

Children. Proceedings, Department Su- 
perintendence, N. E. A., 1906, pp. 179- 

i8 3 . 

KLEMM European Schools. 

Industrial Education in Rural Schools, Re- 
port of Committee, N. E. A., 1905. 

McMuRRY, Elements of General Method, chaps. 2 
CHARLES & 4. 



1 88 



STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 



McMuRRY, FRANK 



PAYNE 

PARKER 

RICE 



ROUILLION 

ROWE 

STONEHEAD 



TEACHERS COLLEGE 
RECORD 

THORNDIKE 
WILSON 



Omissions Advisable in the Present 
Course of Study and Basis for the 
Same. Proceedings, Dept. Superin- 
tendence, N. E. A., 1904, pp. 26-34. 

Public Elementary School Curricula. 

Talks on Pedagogics. 

American History in the Elemen- 
tary Schools. Elementary School 
Teacher, vol. 5, pp. 449-461. 

History in the University Elementary 
School. Elementary School Teacher, 
vol. 5, pp. 521-555. 

Economics of Manual Training. 

Physical Nature of the Child. 

Physical Training in Grammar Schools. 
Proceedings, N. E. A., 1905, pp. 
768-772. 

Vol. i, no. 5. 

Vol. 7, no. i. Elementary School 
Curriculum, first year. 

The Study of Children. Teachers 
College Record, vol. 2, no. 3. 

Pedagogues and Parents, chaps. 4 & 
10. 



CHAPTER VIII 
STUDY AND PREPARATION 

(a) AT HOME 

WHATEVER may be said upon the subject of home 
study, and of preparation of lessons out of school, will 
not find sympathy in the minds of all teachers; much 
less will all parents agree to the statements that follow. 

I am at the outset reminded that should I insist upon 
home work for the child, that is, preparation at home of 
his school work for the following day, I should be falling 
into line with the demands of most teachers, of practi- 
cally all courses of study, and, in fact, should voice the 
views of the majority of parents. If, on the other hand, 
I turn heretic to the extent of saying that children under 
a certain age or ability in school should have little or no 
preparation work outside the schoolroom, that they should 
be expected to prepare no book lessons or exercises at 
home, I stand in danger of being frowned upon by a vast 
number of my fellow teachers, and of being termed a 
theorist by both teacher and parent. While many of my 
readers will at once agree with the general proposition 
herein made, some will either forget it to-morrow, or say 
that while the principle is sound, nothing can be done at 
the present to modify or change the course of events. 

189 



igo STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

A moment's consideration will show that the situation 
is a serious one. It has been forced upon us 
study^ias 6 ^ s ^ ow Degrees ; and few there are outside 
seemed the school fully awake to the conditions as 

they exist. The child in the elementary 
school must prepare just so many pages of history, 
so many problems in number work, and so many chap- 
ters in his language book before the third day of 
February at four o'clock P. M. He must accomplish 
this or he will not pass. He must accomplish it or 
he will not be ready to take his mid-year examina- 
tions. He must accomplish it or he will not be pro- 
moted to the fifth grade in June. He must accomplish 
it ; and here the argument ceases, because the course 
of study so dictates. If the teacher does not bring 
the pupil to the point suggested in the course of study, 
she is a poor teacher, and would, perhaps, better look 
for another position. Each grade makes strenuous de- 
mands upon the one next below it; the high school 
is imposing a straight jacket upon the eighth school 
year ; high school boys and girls are having their work 
planned for them too largely upon the basis of de- 
mands from above. 

This, then, is the condition: infants of seven, eight 
and nine years of age are trudging along the streets, their 
arms filled with books of sufficient weight to destroy their 
equilibrium ; and this seems necessary because there are 
not sufficient hours in the school day in which properly 
to prepare and recite all the lessons the pupils are ex- 



STUDY AND /'A'AVM AM /ION 






pected to learn. This existing condition is not merely 
an evil ; it is a crime. 

Pupils in the first four years of school should have little 

or no outside school work to perform, little 
Dangers of preparation of lessons found in books, or les- 
Burdening sons that require close application in memo- 

rizing and writing. It should be unnecessary 



to suggest that the child of six to nine years 
of age needs to be much in the open air ; needs to have 
abundant freedom and exercise ; needs to have room for 
his body to grow or his mind will be cramped. The sev- 
eral hours that the child spends at school, are, if prop- 
erly spent, sufficient for mental work. 

Many children, below the age I have indicated, carry 
home a long list of words, that they may be able to spell 
them correctly next day ; they must write a certain 
number of sentences containing various classes of words 
for the language lesson ; they must bring to school the 
home work in number : several pages of problems neatly 
written, and each step of the analysis in its exact order ; 
they must learn by heart the definitions of cape, bay and 
isthmus, and be able to recite the lesson in geography. 
Hour after hour is spent at this home work, the results, 
many times, being no better than could be secured at 
school under proper conditions in a comparatively short 
time. Not knowing how to study and being unfit for 
study, time and temper are lost, and the child made 
miserable. 

Only in rare instances is the work prepared at home 



192 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

given any direction. Only memory processes are in- 
volved. There is no background of thought, 

Direction tne answer being the end in view ; and 

Given study aside from this there is no seeming neces- 
sity to accomplish the task. The pupil does 

it because he must. 

The cause of this unnatural condition, how the pres- 
sure has been brought to bear upon the 

Placing of child's mind to make of it, before maturity 

the Respon- 
sibility is reached, an adult in mental gymnastics 

and memory training need not be further 
discussed. The situation confronts us. The teachers of 
to-day are not entirely responsible ; neither school people 
nor parents can be wholly blamed ; we should, so far as 
possible, however, attempt to set right the wrong condi- 
tion. So long as the teacher of the primary school has 
to deal with more than thirty, forty, or even sixty pupils, 
we cannot expect the proper amount of time to be de- 
voted to each pupil while in school. It is considerable 
if they have been amused, much less taught. The child 
does not know how to study, and with the small share of 
attention he gets in school, it is unlikely that he will 
ever learn. This crowded condition means too much 
work with the mass and not enough with individuals ; 
and at once improper and dangerous habits are con- 
tracted. Instead of entering heartily into the work, a 
listless form of attention is engendered ; and an hour is 
required to accomplish what should be done in one-third 
the time. At home, too often, the parent makes no ob- 



STUDY AND PREPARATION 



'93 



jection if the pupil worries and frets over the figures and 
words, facts and definitions, provided he keeps away 
from, and does not trouble, his elders. And it is so 
much easier to answer the child's questions directly than 
it is to lead him to an understanding of the work in hand. 

But aside from the lessons of the book there are many 
things, largely along motor lines, that may 
b^DonT 7 be P rofi tably done at home by the pupils of 
the first school years. Drawing and con- 
struction, representation and the making of things, il- 
lustrating and making clear the book lessons, in fact all 
work of an art or a manual nature may well occupy the 
time out of school. Instead of engaging in work or play 
of an aimless character, the pupil will, if the proper in- 
centives are provided, derive much benefit from his out- 
of-school handiwork. 

Much of the manual work could be planned at school 
and carried on at home, for in this age of advanced 
method and modern practice in education, many parents 
would find it easier to assist in constructive work than 
in the arithmetic or language exercises. If a little en- 
couragement is offered, the life interests of the child 
would show themselves. There would be little need of 
curfew laws and police regulations of youthful misde- 
meanors, if at home and at school ample facilities were 
provided for industrial training. It is a commonplace 
that the reform school is leading the way in educational 
theory and practice through the work it offers in indus- 
trial lines. 

Standards -13 



194 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

Here is a matter in which the parents may assist. 
The school should begin, and the parents insist upon, the 
introduction of manual training throughout the school. 
The school people stand ready to do what the taxpayers 
demand and if, as home work, the pupils have their reg- 
ular tasks to perform along the lines of design, construc- 
tion and decoration, the home may greatly aid the 
school. 

(b) AT SCHOOL 

What has been said of the evils resulting from prepa- 
ration of lessons at home by young pupils, has been said 
not as a plea for idleness either at home or at school. 
Much more time should be devoted, while at school, to 
actual study and preparation of lessons than is now given, 
but it should be under the direction of the teacher. Too 
often the pupil comes to his recitation with only a vague 
idea of the lesson or subject. 

More will be said in another chapter upon the manner 

of study ; but it is at school, where the pupil 

Derived* 868 ^ as ^ e advantage of the teacher's assistance 

fromDi- and counsel, that he can best prepare his 

rected Study 

work. With the least loss of time he can be 
directed to the main features in a given lesson, or be led 
to select the topics demanding most earnest considera- 
tion ; he has access to books and materials other than his 
text from which he may derive assistance and informa- 
tion ; he is inspired by the enthusiasm of numbers doing 
the same or similar tasks as those upon which he is him- 






STUDY AND PREPARATION 195 

self engaged ; he can have the watchful eye of the teacher 
upon him, to call him to his work if necessary and to 
guard him against this or that circumstance which may 
offer a side attraction. If puzzled or perplexed, the 
teacher may by a word or question set the pupil's feet in 
the right path, or perhaps, through his knowledge of the 
child, and his skill as a teacher, he may do him the great- 
est possible service by throwing him entirely upon his own 
resources. Then, too, realizing clearly the difficulties in 
the various lessons, and knowing the pupil's capacity in 
the several lines of work, he is enabled to suggest the 
proportionate length of time that should be put upon a 
topic. If the lesson is not prepared, he must know the 
reason therefor and suggest remedies. 

That the home people frequently are unable to give 

the pupil the assistance he needs in his work 
Difficulty^ 16 f preparation, is accounted 'for, in part, by 

the fact that the methods of to-day differ 
materially from those of the school days of our fathers, 
and that our text -books present their subject-matter in 
entirely new ways. When assistance is asked in the so- 
lution of a problem, the parent is told : "That is not the 
way the teacher wants us to do it," and the former has 
to admit that the new form of analysis or construction is 
beyond him. As the parent's way is frequently that of 
life, while the method of the book is the method of the 
lesson only, sad it is, indeed, that the former is not more 
frequently substituted for the latter. 

But after all, when considering the pupils of the first 



196 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

four years, the study-recitation is about all that should 
be expected of them. They should have the assistance 
of the teacher during the study time as they do in their 
recitations, and should be largely free from books when 
out of school. 

THESES 

1. Teachers and parents generally believe in study and 
preparation of lessons out of school by pupils of the first 
school years. 

2. Such outside preparation seems a necessity be- 
cause of the ground to be covered in the elementary 
school ; classes are large and courses of study must be 
upheld. 

3. Children, immature in years and development, are 
in danger of being overcrowded ; they should have much 
freedom when out of school. 

4. Home work is unsatisfactory because : 

(a) The child does not know how to study ; 

(b) Parents are able to give but little direction. 

5. Neither teacher nor parent can be held entirely re- 
sponsible for existing conditions. 

6. Industrial or constructive work may profitably have 
a place at home, being planned at the school. 

7. The school offers the best advantages for the prepa- 
ration of book lessons because : 

(a) Books and apparatus are at hand ; 

(b) The pupil has the advantage of the teacher's 

knowledge and suggestion. 



STUDY AND PREPARATION 
TOPICS FOR STUDY 

1. Is too much or too little direction usually given the 
pupil in his study periods ? Is the teacher or the parent 
inclined to offer the more assistance to the pupils ? 

2. Suggest the lines of work that can be carried on as 
profitably at home as at school. Compare the length of 
time given to actual preparation at school in the various 
grades with that given at home. 

3. Do pupils of the first four years in school over 
study ? Do they choose to prepare lessons at home ? 

4. Consider the feasibility of allowing the pupils to as- 
sist one another in their study at school. What are the 
dangers and advantages on each side ? 

5. Suggest a plan for home work in those lines that 
tax mainly the physical side of the pupil. 

6. Consider the plan of the older children's giving as- 
sistance to the younger children in home preparation. 
Would, then, the graded school or the unclassified coun- 
try school be best adapted to this end ? 

CONSULT 

BAGLEY The Educative Process, chaps. 19-22. 

BRYAN The Basis of Practical Teaching, chap. 14. 

DEWEY The School and Society. 

Elementary School Curriculum in Teachers 

College Record, vol. 7, pp. 1-12. 
GORDY A Broader Elementary Education, chaps. 15 & 

16. 
HINSDALE The Art of Study, chaps. 6-n. 



198 



STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 



MOORE Science of Study. 

O'SHEA Dynamic Factors in Education, chap. 18. 

PARKER Talks on Pedagogics. 

THORNDIKE Notes on Child Study, chaps. 15, 17, 19 & 20. 

WILSON Pedagogues and Parents, chaps. 13 & 14. 



CHAPTER IX 
THE RECITATION PROCESS 

(a) SELECTION OF MATERIAL 

As already stated, there can be no method without 

subject-matter. Method must presuppose a knowledge 

of subject-matter. The studies must be selected and the 

curriculum arranged before method can be ap- 

Mlteriauhe plied to the teachin g of the various branches. 

First step In the recitation process, the selection of the 
material follows immediately the decision as 

to the subject or branch of instruction to be pursued. 
Subjects are so varied and their number so extensive 
that the selection of study material must be 
largely a matter of elimination. Much that 



the selective j n it se lf [ s valuable must be pushed aside to 

Process 

make place for things of greater importance. 
The question of relative values must here receive grave 
consideration. 

Local conditions will determine largely the selection 
of the study material. The surroundings of the school 
and the home will play no small part. The conditions 
pertaining to the down town portions of a crowded city 
differ widely from those of the town or village; and the 
isolated country district presents a series of problems 

199 



200 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

similar to neither. In each instance the study material 
must be chosen with locality as a determining factor. 

The nationality of pupils, the financial condition of par- 
ents, the moral and ethical life of the homes, these are 
elements of prime importance. In no small degree will the 
selection of material, especially in its details, be determined 
by the industry or craft pertaining among the patrons, 
whether that of manufacture, shipping, farming, milling, 
lumbering, mining; the curriculum in a community en- 
gaged in commercial lines must surely vary from that in a 
community where literary pursuits prevail. These and 
scores of other problems must be met and weighed by the 
individual teacher. 

In certain city or country districts, boys particularly, 
leave school at an early age. In localities 
wnere this condition is apparent, extraordi- 



both inter- narv care must be exercised in the planning 

estingand 

serviceable of the curriculum, not alone to present the 
interesting, that the pupil may be held for the 
longest possible time, but that those who must leave early 
may have the advantage of the most serviceable course of 
study that it is possible to arrange for that class of stu- 
dents. All of this assumes that the individual teacher is 
bound down by no course of study planned for all alike. 
In lower classes, and when dealing with certain school 
subjects, it may be wise to follow no text- 
book, but teachers in general will find it ad- 
vantageous to have such a guide. This will 
tend to do away with the danger of flying wide of the mark. 



THE RECITATION PROCESS 201 

The text-book, in whatever subject the choice is to be 
made, should be the very best that can be secured. No 

influence should be allowed to enter into the 
Text Books* selection, save merit alone. No book con- 
Based upon cern, no county or city board, no "influential 
^on^raft member," no author friend should count in 

this matter, only as such influence stands for 
the best. The public schools are administered by public 
servants and supported by public funds; and no teacher 
or text-book, no equipment, no school comfort or conven- 
ience is too good for those who seek an education in our 
institutions of learning. 

But you who are working under a city or county course 
of study may say that here the argument closes. The 
course of study is blocked out. You must teach what the 
outline dictates and from the books furnished or required. 

It is possible some teachers are less compe- 

tent to select the studv material than are the 



be allowed board members by whom they are engaged. 

Latitude if 

Besuits If so, such teachers should be required to 



warrant see k OCCU p a tion in other fields. Incompe- 
tency among board members is not a license for inability 
on the part of teachers; and those who have most to do 
with the schools know most about their make-up. Teach- 
ers who are competent to study conditions so as to know 
what is best for a given student or class should be allowed 
not only to suggest, but to choose with large freedom as 
well. They should then be held responsible for results. 
The teacher who is working under an unwieldy system 



202 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

where much machinery is necessary must recognize a 
central authority. He must "follow copy." In the lower 
grades, however, if tact and judgment are used, the best 
books may be secured, even though they are not listed in 
the course of study or included in the State Series. Such 
a teacher will usually be permitted to perform his work 
in his own way. No violence will be done to rules or regu- 
lations, and the teacher's chances for reelection will not 
be endangered. One thing he must do, and to good 
purpose. He must accomplish results. 

But the securing of a good text is not all. The proper 
material as contained in the book must be selected. The 
best material for a given lesson may not always be found 
upon the page following yesterday's recitation. It may 
be elsewhere in the text-book or it may be in several 
places. It will do no harm to draw upon a lesson already 
covered or to levy upon a chapter in advance, if there be 
found the material needed and providing that the work is 
understood. 

The text-book should be used as a guide only. It is 
the compass to point the way and to keep 
' m k^ course - Any available au- 



Guide thority whatsoever may be used, all sources 

contributing. Nor is the lesson material to 
be selected from books alone. In most subjects abundant 
material offers itself for use. This may be selected from 
maps, charts, newspapers and magazines; from natural 
objects, business interests, play and work; from the vo- 
cations, interests and achievements of men and of the 



THE RECITATION PROCESS 



203 



students themselves; from incidents of street life, the asso- 
ciation of student with student; from con- 
versation and observation; from excursions to 
woods and fields and streams; from \isi 
museums, quarries, mills, manufacturing plants, buildings 
in course of construction and produce markets; from in- 
vestigation of shipping by land and sea; and from the 
planting, tending and harvesting of crops; in fact every 
interest and every activity of life will furnish study mate- 
rial for one or another recitation. 

(b) DEVELOPMENT OF THE PLAN 

Each lesson or series of lessons should be carefully 
planned and worked out before being pre- 
sented to the class. Having taught a given 
Planned by subject for a period of years should not be an 

the Teacher 

excuse for the nonpreparation of each day s 
lesson. Just as each pupil in a class demands a treatment 
differing from that extended to each other member, so 
each class should be studied, and each lesson to be pre- 
sented prepared beforehand. 

In planning lessons various methods are employed. 
Some teachers find it convenient and beneficial to arrange 
each lesson or topic upon paper or in a notebook, fol- 
lowing much the same order as that used in some normal 

schools. For instance, they would determine, 
Les^pi^n First > the aim > purpose or object of the 

lesson, what it is purposed to bring out and 
the results it is hoped to reach; Second, the material to be 



204 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

used, whether found in text-book or in other illustrative 
matter, giving sources of information; Third, the method 
of the lesson or manner of procedure, showing how the 
various steps are to be taken and why. 

Those who do not use the written scheme should for- 
mulate their plan in some other way. No teacher should 
attempt to present a topic to a class without having first 
decided why he selects this rather than some other lesson, 
why he is to present it in one rather than in another form, 
or whether he is using the most desirable media and illus- 
trative material there is at hand. 

This does not mean that the teacher is to proceed in the 
class step by step as he has worked out the 

Circura- 

stances may lesson in preparation. Indeed, the exact 
conditions he hopes for or expects may not 



theRecita- be present. Outward circumstances, the 
mental or physical attitude of the pupils, or 
other conditions may vary. Some unthought-of direction 
may be given the trend of lesson or discussion by an un- 
expected query or an answer unlooked for. All such 
circumstances only make it the more imperative that the 
teacher be fully prepared, the better to cope with any or 
all emergencies. With a thorough preparation he is the 
more likely to be able to answer any question that may 
arise, or to keep the class or individual from drifting, or 
himself from being thrown off the main track of the 
lesson. 

If lessons are planned ahead, the teacher has opportunity 
to build up, to change, or to modify the plan. He should 



THE RECITATION PROCESS 



205 



reduce the matter to its lowest terms, cutting away any 
unnecessary underbrush, yet at the same time nl 
the pupil of nothing that will assist his growth. By de- 
veloping the plan of a lesson, the teacher minimizes the 
danger of haphazard work and of being taken unawares 
and thus compelled to acknowledge himself unprepared. 
He is the more able to proceed in a logical manner, hav- 
ing in mind what has gone before, and looking forward 
to what is to come. 

(c) ASSIGNMENT OF LESSON 

With a well thought-out and analyzed plan of pro- 
cedure the teacher may readily and with 

Methods of i f , 

Assignment some degree of understanding make an 
assignment for the following day. The 
statement, "take the next ten pages," or "to the middle 
of the next chapter," or "the next lesson" will do oc- 
casionally, but good pedagogy demands that it be carried 
not too far. 

Lessons are frequently disconnected, and irrelevant one 
to another or to any other interest of the school or home. 
The topical assignment will usually bring the 
best results. If the pages of the text-book 
contain all the information to which it is de- 
sired the pupils have access, well and good. When the 
lessons are grouped topically, assignments may be made 
both for individual and class work; and the pupil may be 
referred to outside sources, or required to discover for 
himself material bearing upon the topic in hand. 



206 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

An assignment should be definite. Care must be ex- 

ercised to the end that every pupil understands clearly 

what is expected of him in preparing for his recitation. 

It is ofttimes best to assign work at the be- 

Definite* g mnm f a l esson - If this task be left until 

Assignments the close of the recitation, the assignment is 
sometimes hurried and unsatisfactory, the 
ground to be covered being only partially made clear. 
If the hoped-for ground be not covered in the recitation, 
a different assignment from the one planned may be 
necessary. 

Even in the lower grades it is sometimes best to assign 
special topics or various phases of a given topic to in- 
dividual pupils, making each responsible for the lesson in 
general, and at the same time seeking to awaken an in- 
terest through individual responsibility. By varying the 
common plan the pupils themselves may be asked how 
much they can cover in a given lesson. Some 
pupils, particularly anxious to please the 



HIS pwn teacher, will suggest an overlong lesson. 
Others may either underestimate their own 
capacity or suggest a short lesson as a means of gaining 
more time for something else. By noting carefully the 
desires of each pupil the teacher may the better study 
their characteristics. 

While the assignments must be definite, it is not always 
wise to give every reference or designate every source of 
prospective information. Something should be left to 
the ingenuity of the pupil. Encourage the habit of 



THE RECITATION PROCESS -07 

bringing in information gained from outside so 

Great care must be 1 lest work 

Pupusmuj c i t hcr too easy or too difficult be assig: 

Robbed of then once having requested a pupil to 

form a task only the best of reasons should 

be accepted for noncompliance. 

(d) HOW TO STUDY 

The next step after the lesson or topic has been assigned 
is its preparation by the class members. Children do 
not know how to study. They read their lessons and 
give time to them, but seldom study them. 

One of the first requisites after becoming interested is 

the ability to concentrate. The mind adrift 

The value of cannot study; it can only dream. Unless 

Concentra- ' ' J 

tion the mind can be riveted upon the desired 

problem in such a way as to shut out every- 
thing of a foreign nature, the lesson in hand cannot really 
be studied. Until the pupil is able to do this he would 
best not attempt to prepare his school work in a room 
where conversation and social intercourse are being carried 
on. 

The pupil may at times with profit, read the lesson 
through from the beginning, whether it be a problem in 
arithmetic, a statement in history, or a paragraph in lit- 
erature. By miscalling a word or a figure, the whole 
meaning or sense of a statement or question may be lost. 

A few moments of close application, of uninterrupted 
study will accomplish more than several hours of sporadic, 



208 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

intermittent, or mind-wandering attempts. If the pupil 
has a study hour at school, the teacher will be able to 
note the points at which he needs assistance and offer 
suggestions accordingly. Encourage the pupil to ask 
himself what he is about to do, as in a geometry lesson he 
is taught to determine and state at the outset what he has 
given and what he is to prove. 

If the pupil has acquired the proper habits of study, he 
will not inform the teacher so frequently 

Clear State- 
ment a He- that he is "all mixed up." Proper habits of 

Proper 1 study lead to clear thought and exact ex- 
Modes of pression, and thus to rational action. Fre- 

Study . 

quently on attempting to answer a question, a 
student will be unable to state the question to which he 
seeks answer. He has not learned to think nor has he 
formed habits of study. 

As has been suggested, material other than that found 
in the text-book may be of value to the pupil. An illus- 
tration is in point. A grammar grade class in United 
States history had been studying the causes of the Revolu- 
tionary War, and had prepared papers to be read in 
class. One of the girls in the class, through discussion at 

home, had learned something of one of the 
individual- more remote causes no t mentioned in the 

Dwarfed; text. When she presented this in her paper 

An Elustra- 

tion she was reprimanded by the teacher. It de- 

veloped subsequently in conversation with 
the teacher that she did not desire information other than 
that of the text, lest the pupils gain ideas faulty or er- 



THE A'tt 7 / . I / /< >.Y /'KOCESS MQ 

roncous. This teacher, instead of stimulating in the child 
the spirit of individual initiative, was closing one of the 
avenues of greatest culture. 

Some place interest as the only key to right habits of 
study. Some insist that the kindergarten offers a sug- 
gestion as to methods desirable in the upper schools. 
Many grade teachers complain of the pupils who come to 
them from the kindergarten, and insist that the play at- 
titude has been so strong in early training, that serious 
habits of study are difficult to form. In a recent number 
of the North American Review,* Professor Barrett Wen- 
dell of Harvard says that nothing has done more to break 
down serious habits among the young than the use of 
is the Kin kindergarten methods beyond the kindcr- 
dergarten garten age. In other words, that the dressing 
U P f ever y duty in the costume of play de- 



Habits of prives the boy or girl of that training which 
alone comes from the performance of duty 
at whatever cost. Professor Wendell pleads for the cul- 
tivation of the conscience and the will in a child as in a 
man, and insists that the greatest injury we can do a de- 
veloping soul is to teach it that all duty should be sugar- 
coated. There comes a time when the wise teacher lays 
aside the ribbons and tells the boy to put on his overalls. 
Whatever view may be taken regarding this matter, 
there can be no question that proper habits of study go 
far toward producing a desirable intellectual and moral 
atmosphere. 

* Vol. 179, p. 396 (Sept., 1904). 
Standards 14 



210 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

(e) HEARING THE RECITATION VS. TEACHING 

The final stage in the recitation process, so far as teacher 
or school is concerned, is that generally spoken of as the 
recitation. This is the time when teacher and pupils are 
actually together. The custom is common of devoting 
this period to hearing the lesson. Questions are asked, 
for the most part by the teacher, the answers 
TheQues- cominsr from the class. These questions, in 

tion and An- 
swer Method exact phraseology or in substance, are taken, 

many times, from the book, in the order in 
which they occur. Thus the lesson takes the form of a 
quiz. Too little information is imparted by the teacher. 
Simply to hear pupils recite is not teaching. Teaching 
is more than hearing a recitation. The teacher who hears 
the recitation is keeping school. Caution must be used 
that the pupil is not weakened by having his work done 

for him. Out of his larger store of knowl- 
The Teacher edge, however, and the preparation he has 

must Con- *" 

tribute made, the teacher should be enabled to add 

greatly to the child's fund of information, 
information the child cannot acquire from books or at 
home. 

Too much talking is a dangerous thing. If the teacher 
talks much the class will, more and more, lose interest 
and will hesitate to give expression to their ideas. This 
may finally lead to lack of preparation. The incident 
is related of the boy, who, on returning from school, 
was asked by his father what he had learned that day. 



THE RECITATION PROCESS 

"Nothing," replied the boy; "the teacher talked all the 
time." 

What may be called the study-recitation, is, if projx-rly 
conducted, of great value. Instead of assigning a lesson 
to be prepared, the lesson is first taken up in class for 
analysis. The teacher goes over the work, 
^citation" suggesting methods of approach, and ques- 
tioning the pupils on the problems to be met 
and conquered. At the same time care is exercised that 
the difficulties the pupil should meet and overcome are 
not laid out before him. By suggesting additional sources 
of information bearing upon the lesson, and by adding to 
the interest in such manner as the teacher's own knowl- 
edge makes possible and his mind prompts, the class may 
be stimulated to effort and may begin their task, not 
groping blindly, but with understanding of how and 
what to study. 

This study-recitation or study-preparation lesson is then 
a forerunner of a development lesson. Not only is the 
pupil's knowledge of facts tested, but he is helped to in- 
formation at once useful and educational. 

The art of questioning is extremely valuable in the 

recitation. Quick, well-directed questions, relative to 

the matter in hand stimulate interest. Judgment must 

determine whether a question, unanswered 

Questioning ^ Q ^ pupi ^ - g {Q ^ passcd Qn to anol h lT . 

Sometimes this method brings best results. 
Again, when a student fails to answer satisfactorily, he 
may be asked another question on a different phase of 



212 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

the lesson, or the original question modified, the better 
to be comprehended. 

Many teachers make the mistake of repeating an answer 
given. For example, the teacher says, "Charles, what is 
the case?" "Nominative case," says Charles, to which 
the teacher replies, "Yes, nominative case." This mode 

of repeating an answer has the effect some- 
Danger m times of impressing the point upon the pupil's 
ff 6 !Sswers mind. With the habit established by the 

teacher so that the pupil expects his answer to 
be repeated, the effectiveness is lost. Time also is con- 
sumed with no corresponding benefit resulting. The class 
members, knowing that the question may be answered 
twice, give attention to neither answer. It is generally 
best to ask the question before calling upon any particular 
pupil by name, thus throwing equal responsibility for 
the answer upon all members of the class. 

One of the gravest and most common dangers of the 
recitation is that of being led astray by a query or dis- 
cussion not germane to the lesson. The pupil who is un- 

prepared may assume deep interest and ask 

a question entirely foreign to the subject 



comes the under discussion, in order to draw the 

teacher away from the recitation. Irrelevant 

questions may, of course, be asked in all fairness at any 

time. The teacher must guard against making the lesson 

so broad as to include any question asked. It is, as a rule, 

better to hold the discussion within fairly well-defined limits. 

While rapid questions and answers bring good results, 



THE RECITATION PROCESS 213 

it is not always best to pass the question along if the reply 
is not forthcoming at once. Permit the pupil to think if 
out. Too great hurry may rob him of the very training 
he needs. 

Leaving a pupil in doubt as to the correctness of an 
answer will ofttimcs stimulate thought. Ask the same 
question of several, receiving the answers without com- 
ment. This allows for freedom and variety in expression 
and a fuller consideration of the topic than might other- 
wise be possible. It will also tend to make a student 
sure of his position and to hold it against argument. 

If the teacher has thoroughly and conscientiously pre- 
pared for his lesson, he need not then worry about fol- 
lowing a cut-and-dried line of action. In his Talks to 
Teachers,* Professor James says, "The advice I would 
give to most teachers would be in the words of one who is 
herself an admirable teacher ' Prepare y ours el j in the 
subject so well that it will be always on tap; then in the 
class room trust your spontaneity and fling away all 
further care.' " 

Encouragement of a dull or poorly prepared student is 

sometimes essential. Sarcasm should seldom be resorted 

to; and spite and irritation have absolutely 

Encourage- no pj ace m the school. A pupil should rarely 

ment as 

Necessary be humiliated or threatened. Just as cn- 



couragement and a "well done" bring good 
results, so does sharp and just criticism have 
its place. Fairness is the one thing that must be looked 
* Page 222. 



214 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

to. No favoritism should ever be shown. The teacher, 
be he ever so strict, will be admired if he has a reputa- 
tion for square dealing. 

Many pupils are sensitive to a fault; and with them 
harshness or nagging is very injurious. It is human 
nature even for adults to want praise and favorable com- 
ment when some task has been done creditably. Teachers 
are too apt to forget that the sympathetic nature of the 
child demands recognition on the part of those whom it 
seeks to emulate. When it is deserved, the teacher should 
not withhold the favorable criticism even though it be 
given merely in a look or word. 

As little as possible should the teacher use the book in 
class, or ask questions in a direct order as given in the 
text. Neither should the pupils be questioned in any 
regular order. In some classes where this method is 
pursued, each pupil picks out the question he knows will 
come to him, prepares on that and ignores the remainder 
of the lesson. If a question is asked of the one least ex- 
pecting it, all will soon learn to attend. Practise the 
method of calling upon a class member to ask a question 
that will clear up a vague point, and you will be surprised 
at the good work that may be done. While individuality 
is to be desired, mutual helpfulness and team work are of 
great value. 

Avoid a set attitude or position before the class, just as 
you avoid using the same phrases time after time, or of 
employing only one mode of questioning. Do not feel 
that there is any reason why you should always sit or 



THE RECITATION /'A 

always stand in class. Be alert in movement, ready in 
action, but calm and forceful withal. 

The test or examination has its place, but must not be 
abused. A recapitulation may often prove best at the 
beginning of a recitation. It is a question with many 
whether a pupil who fails continually in his daily recita- 
tions but who comes through on a final examination 
should be credited with an adequate knowledge of the 
subject. By " cramming" for a short time before an ex- 
amination, a pupil may be able to pass creditably, but 
the knowledge he has gained will likely leave him as 
readily as it was acquired. On the other 
hand, the student whose class work has 1 
beyond reproach for a period of weeks or 

tions 

months, may fail in an examination. The 
excitement of the moment renders the student incompe- 
tent; and a grave injustice may be done him if he is 
kept back or required to go over the same ground again. 
Here, as elsewhere, the mental dimensions of the stu- 
dent must be taken, and each case decided on its own 
merits. 

Too much stress must not be placed upon examinations, 
but both oral and written tests, not at stated times nec- 
essarily, but when least expected, will tend to stimulate 
interest and increase standards of efficiency. 

THESES 

i. Great care must be exercised in planning the cur- 
riculum, that it may not only be interesting, but that it 



2i6 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

may make the pupils more efficient and their life work 
more effective. 

2. The best books should be used as texts, and these 
only as suggestive. All available sources of informa- 
tion should be drawn upon, thus widening the pupil's 
vision. 

3. It is essential that the teacher plan each lesson he 
is to present. 

4. In assigning lesson or topic to class members, the 
method should be varied. Assignment must be definite 
and clear, but not such as to rob the pupil of effort. 

5. Pupils should be taught how to study. Concentra- 
tion of mind and effort is essential. 

6. In the recitation the teacher must himself contribute. 
The art of questioning must be developed, and stereo- 
typed methods avoided. 

7. Favorable as well as adverse criticism has a place. 

8. Tests and examinations have great value, but they 
must be used with discrimination. 

TOPICS FOR STUDY 

1. Give the arguments for and against a teacher of a 
given grade selecting the study material for such grade. 

2. Suppose the curriculum of a country school to be 
made up of such study material as bears a close relation 
to city conditions. What are the benefits from such a 
plan? 

3. Is the average age of pupils in the eighth school year 
greater in the city or in the country? Is the tendency 



THE RECITATION PROCESS 



217 



greater in rural or urban communities for boys to leave 
school before the eighth grade? 

4. Consider the advantages and disadvantages of a 
"State Series" of text-books. 

5. Consider the relative merits for class use of the 
present texts in history and geography, and such books 
as are classed as supplementary readers treating of i : 
manners and customs, etc. 

6. Should books and other school equipment be fur- 
nished the pupil, the same to remain school property, or 
should the pupil purchase them ? 

7. Suggest how pupils may be interested in gathering 
material outside the regular text used. What are the best 
methods of securing and using materials for museums, 
collections, scrapbooks, filing cases, etc.? 

8. Secure information from your fellow students or 
your teacher as to the value of note taking and the use of 
notebooks. Should the pupil take notes in permanent 
form, or with the idea in mind of transcribing them later ? 

9. Ask a class of grade pupils how they prepare a lesson. 
Suppose that you have charge of a class during study 
hour or that you take them to the library : how will you 
assist them in their preparation ? 

10. How does the kindergarten assist in or detract 
from the work of the next grades above? 

11. Where is there least danger: in over-encouragement, 
or in adverse criticism of pupils? 

12. Discuss fully the value of, and danger in, exami- 
nations, tests, reports, marks, prizes, medals, etc. 



218 



STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 



CONSULT 

BAGLEY The Educative Process, chaps. 16-22. 

BRUMBAUGH The Making of a Teacher, chap. 20. 

BRYAN The Basis of Practical Teaching, chap. 10. 

DEWEY School and Society, chap. 3. 

GIFFIN School Days of the Fifties, chaps. 3, 5, 9 & n. 

GREENWOOD Successful Teaching, pp. 75-81; 97-106. 

HINSDALE The Art of Study, pp. 7-89. 

McMuRRY Suggestions for the Improvement of the Study 
Period. Proceedings, Department Superin- 
tendence, N. E. A., 1906, pp. 78-84. 

PAGE Theory and Practice of Teaching, chaps. 8 & 9. 

PUTNAM Manual of Pedagogy, chap. 9. 

SEELEY The Foundations of Education, chap. 18. 

THORNDIKE Principles of Teaching, pp. 257-264. 

WHITE School Management, pp. 21-30; 130-166. 



CHAPTER X 

TRAINING, PROFESSIONAL GROWTH AND 
RECOMPENSE OF THE TEACHER 

A. INITIAL PREPARATION 

(a) Knowledge of Subject-Matter 

IF the normal or training school that prepares for gen- 
eral teaching is on a high-school basis, that is, if it ad- 
mits only those who have had the equivalent of a sec- 
ondary education, then its students should possess a 
knowledge of subject-matter sufficient to 
Grammar warrant their teaching without a technical 
school Re- study of subjects in the normal school. In 

quirement 

for Normal other words, the years spent in training 



should be applied professionally-wise. If, 
on the other hand, the normal school ad- 
mits from the eighth school year or takes those with 
less than an academic education, subject-matter, as such, 
must be pursued along with the professional work. In 
any event, as suggested in a former chap- 
subject- ter * a knowledge of subject-matter is ab- 

Matter vs. 

Method solutely essential to a teacher and should 

precede the work in method. No one can 

be expected to teach that which he does not himself 

* See page 28. 
219 



220 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

know, and he should be expected to know much more 
than he is required to teach. This is a point upon which 
too much emphasis cannot be laid. 

(b) The Value of Psychology 

Psychology is the interpretation of human nature. 

There is nothing strange or wonderful about it. We 

talk of physiological psychology, or of descriptive psy- 

chology, or of empirical or experimental or 

Psychology, faculty psvcholosrv ; but we mean only human 

the Interpre- 

tation of nature. Some years ago a mother said of 

N^lre ner daughter, who, at the year's beginning, 

was being classified for psychology, " I sup- 
pose she is to take up the study of the soul." 

We study human nature and the laws governing 
human nature, that we may develop common sense, 
the rarest of all senses. But our study of psychology 
usually is involved. It is bound up with 
Philosophy, and pedagogy, and metaphysics 



the study of and method ; and so intricate is it, and so 

Psychology , . 

mixed and confused the terminology, that in 
most cases not only are the students bewildered, but 
the teachers themselves, when they pause to analyze 
their work, find that they are all but as confused as the 
students. 

Psychology is studied in the normal school and by 
students in training generally, but possessing a knowl- 
edge of the principles of the science will not produce 
a teacher. 



TIIK TEACHER: TRAINING AND GROWTH 221 

Only when the facts or laws of psychology ai 
in pedagogy, pedagogy being appli 

L u^tio^f" ch lgy onl y then is the latter of d 
Law value to the teacher. But the law. 

be applied rationally or undcrstandingly until 
they are grasped and comprehended. As Dr. Emerson 
E. White says, " The method of teaching a human mind 
knowledge involves the process by which the mind 
acquires such knowledge, and for this we must go to 
psychology." * 

In beginning his work as a teacher of normal students, 
the author chose for a text in one of his classes a volume 
he had read and thought he had studied, a volume enti- 
tled an Introduction to the subject. When the year was 

half-spent, he began to realize that the large 
Tei^BookB number of students possessed only vague, 

indefinite ideas of the subject in hand. A 
few weeks later he awoke to the fact that the book was 
to him a blank ; and at the close of the year he was 
driven to the conclusion that the psychologist had mis- 
taken his calling. Instead of an Introduction to psychol- 
ogy, the book endeavored to cover the most obscure fields 
of mentality ; its writer had floundered beyond his depth 
and ours, had used terms understood neither by himself 
nor by us, to the end that he had succeeded admirably 
in beclouding our minds as well as his own. 

It is then this vagueness, this obscure phraseology 
used by too many of our writers on psychology, that 

* The Art of Teaching, p. 10. 



222 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

renders the subject dense. This is one reason for the 
feeling on the part of many who study psy- 
Ptoaseoiogy chology, and this feeling is shared by many 
Causes Dis- teachers who, without a professional train- 
Subj 6 e ct r m g have been reasonably successful in their 
work, that psychology is pure theory and 
cannot be applied, that the only way to learn to teach is 
to teach. Experience, they say, is not merely the best, 
it is the only teacher, and the teacher moreover is born, 
not made. 

The fallacy of this view when carried to the ultimate 
is apparent. It is controverted by the presence of the 
thousands who are in our normal schools. It is not nec- 
essary for us in this day to go back to the beginning and 
to work our way through experience. Experience on our 
parts is undoubtedly the best teacher, but 
t ^ ie experiences of others are of great value 
for us also. Again, it is said that psychol- 
ogy cannot tell us exactly what to do, or what method 
to employ ; that, depending upon circumstances, one may 
use this method or that ; any one of several may apply 
with equal force. There is a measure of truth in this 
statement, but education comes through the process of 
elimination as well as that of accretion. Psychology, 
when applied, teaches us many times what not to do, and 
if unable in a given instance to suggest what method, or 
scheme or plan should be operative, it may point with 
certainty to that which should not be done. 

The contention is sometimes advanced that he who 



THE TEACHER: TRAINING AND GROWTH 223 

would be a teacher needs no training in practice 
pedagogic lines, because, having the experience of many 
teachers as a guide, he can readily say what should be 
imitated and what avoided. " It would be as reasonable 
to assert," says Oscar Browning, " that an invalid who 
has passed through the hands of many physicians would 
make an excellent doctor." If the study of psychology 
and normal school work is to be effective and to throw 
light upon educational problems, theory and practice 
must go together. 

(c) Attitude of the Prospective Teacher 

Most of those who enter the normal school or pro- 
fessional course come fresh from secondary or other in- 
stitutions of learning that they may prepare for teach- 
ing. What has inspired them to look in this direction ? 
What has inspired you ? A brother or sister or parent 
or friend has taught, or is teaching, and why not you ; 
you must earn a livelihood to support either yourself or 
family members ; you think you love children, or enjoy 
instructing, or glory in power, or believe you 
Reasons for have ability as a disciplinarian, or consider 

Entering the ' 

Profession the work easy or clean or dignified or above 
reproach, or the hours short ; you desire to 
tide over the period between graduation and matrimony ; 
you are making it a stepping-stone to the occupation or 
profession you expect to follow through life ; you see in 
teaching opportunity to accomplish great good and to be 
of service to mankind ; you come for one or more or all 



224 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

or none of these reasons, but if asked why you are in the 
training school or are teaching to-day, you might be un- 
able to return a satisfactory reply. 

The student who enters the normal school comes from 
an academic atmosphere an atmosphere of 
stud y> of P lav > of companionship. But how 



High school different the atmosphere of the high school 
from that of the professional institution. In 
the former there was work to be done, so many prob- 
lems in algebra, so many pages in history, a certain set 
of experiments in physics or chemistry. In a general 
sense the student knows when he has accomplished his 
task. Many times he works for the answer and if the 
answer be wrong, either the book or the teacher so in- 
forms him. In the high school the student has duties 
and obligations to be sure, but the processes are aca- 
demic. In the normal school there are two, three or four 
years of work before him, and still further in the future 
lies actual participation in his chosen profession. That 
it is difficult to dissociate these academic standards from 
the professional attitude it is necessary to assume, all will 
agree ; and yet how essential that the latter be made 
a part of the very life of the teacher, 
though not that the view should be less op- 



tudeisPro- timistic, or the life be less full, less joyous 
than before. There is now a motive, a pur- 
pose, because the teacher should have a distinct, clear- 
cut aim. 

With a definite motive comes a somewhat changed 



THE TEACHER: TRAINING AND GROWTH 225 

method, a new attitude. In the academic atmosphere 
there is much of this, that, or the other before the stu- 
dent, with a more or less definite answer in each case. 
In the normal school you study psychology or pedagogy 
or method as applied to the various subjects with which 
you are supposed to be familiar, and if you are not cau- 
tious you lose or do not gain the very student attitude you 
seek. No longer is it possible to clear the way with a 
Yes or No. More and more must the student do his own 
thinking. It is not enough to know that the book says 
so and so, though too often in the elementary and second- 
ary schools is this considered sufficient ; the question is, 
" What do you think about it ? " 

An illustration is in point. A group of boys fresh 
from a recitation in the fourth year of the high school 
were talking over the recent lesson. It was evident that 
one of the young men had thought himself prepared be- 
fore attending the class; and, because he 
Thought h ac | devoted more time to this particular les- 

Values an 

illustration son than he had to any other, he was sur- 
prised that the teacher should have shown 
dissatisfaction. One of his fellows remarked that time 
put upon a lesson was not the only factor to be consid- 
ered. He assured his classmate that in the recitations of 
Mr. A. one must be able to answer the questions, to be 
sure, but he must read between the lines as well ; he 
must look up the implications and prepare upon any pos- 
sible issues growing out of the lesson. As I heard these 
comments, serious and to the point, I said to myself, 

Standards 15 



226 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

" This satisfies me ; Mr. A. is a good teacher and will 
succeed." 

(d) Ability to Teach 

The individual who seeks training in a professional 
school that he may qualify for teaching should have a 

real desire to enter the profession, and if 
Province of possible should possess the natural qualities 
the Training most essential to the teacher. In any event 

he must be assured, and must assure his in- 
structors before he is allowed to be graduated, that he 
has the ability to teach. No normal school should grad- 
uate as a teacher one who does not give ample evidence 
of superior ability in his chosen field ; and those, who, 
after a reasonable time spent in a training school do not 
promise well, should be advised to pursue some other oc- 
cupation. One does himself great injustice to enter the 
profession unless he is in every way, by nature and train- 
ing, adapted thereto. A still greater injustice he does 
those who are so unfortunate as to come under his in- 
struction. 

B. THE TEACHER'S READING 

Every teacher and every student, as well as everyone 
who pretends to interest himself in educational affairs, 

should begin early to accumulate such books 
o?B<Joks 6 as are best adapted to his needs. Discretion 

should be exercised in the choosing of a 
book, as a teacher can afford to read only the best ; and 



THE TEACHER: TRAINING AND GROWTH 227 

he should purchase only those that will go to make up a 
working library. They must be selected with more care 
than was shown by the man, less literary than wealthy, 
who in furnishing his home requested the dealer to 
him some books. On being questioned as to what par- 
ticular line of reading would best suit him, the pun 
replied that books with blue, green and brown covers, 
and with gilt lettering on the backs, such as he had been 
accustomed to see in the homes of his friends, were of 
the kind he wished: 

The teacher must not look upon the book as an article 
of furniture or a bit of decoration. He must use the 
book as a companion and should treat it as a friend and 
counselor. It is better to read a good book thoroughly 
and to reread it, than to plunge through the pages of 
many volumes of weak, superficial matter. 

Thorough- . 

ness and Dis- A book should never be mutilated, but no 

^Beading 11 volume is to g d to be used 5 and th e per- 

Essentiaito son who is tempted to mark the passages 

Good Results j i i 

and make notes and comments upon the 
margins is the one who is likely to get the most from 
his book. 

No teacher can afford to read a book simply because 
it is for the moment popular or because some one else has 
read it. Many people read books as they see an art gal- 
lery, or as they do Europe. In their desire to see every- 
thing, they observe little, comprehend less, and remember 
almost nothing at all. Each book should be selected 
with a purpose, and so read that the mind may retain 



228 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

for use the most valuable thoughts and ideas contained 
therein. 

It is an admirable plan for the teacher to discuss his 
book with a friend. Sometimes it is best to consult with 
a member of the profession or with a fellow student ; and 
again suggestions of much value may come by talking 
with those engaged in other lines of work, 
interchange whose thoughts are directed upon other pur- 

Boo^vlhTes suits - Tne eve of tne critic should not dim 
itself by looking for fallacies or by searching 
out the mistakes, because the aim should be to get from 
the book the greatest possible good it can give, selecting 
for afterthought and consideration the portions of great- 
est value, then holding them in readiness for instant use, 
just as the finer, more thoroughly ground material is held 
in suspension in a rapidly flowing stream. 

Books of a reference nature and those not likely to 
be in frequent demand may be secured from the public 
library. The number and completeness of our public libra- 
ries have made unnecessary the purchase, by the individ- 
ual teacher, of such volumes. A borrowed book should 
be treated with the utmost care and returned at the 
reader's earliest convenience to private owner or public 
library without injury. 

Read much, read thoroughly, read the best, read with 
a purpose, read to remember ; be critical within reason, 
judge with caution, compare without haste and conclude 
with a willingness to revise your opinion, for the light of 
to-morrow may dispel the ignorance of to-day. 



TEACHER: TRAINING AND GROWTH 229 

C. THE TEACHER'S ASSOCIATES 

If the effect of example upon the pupils is such as to 
make for higher or lower standards <t moral- 
ity so is the effect u Pn the teacher's life of 
worthy a higher or a lower grade according as his 

Associates 

associates are selected from this or that body 
of individuals. 

The opportunities of the teacher are unexcelled in the 
matter of choice of society. The best is open to him. 
Not only should he choose to be a part of the best and 
highest, but he should make it his province, his privilege 
and his duty, to help mold and shape the social atmos- 
phere, and to do his part in perfecting and uplifting the 
lives of the individuals with whom he may be placed. 
While not seeking to shun responsibilities that may be 
his in dealing with the less desirable elements of society, 
and while looking down upon or ignoring none, it is well 
to look upward rather than downward, forward instead 
of backward ; better it is to touch elbows with those who 
in intellectual attainment and strength of character are 
his superiors than to lower his own standards by sub- 
tracting from himself that which marks the man. 

D. CONTACT WITH THE ISSUES OF LIFE 

(a) Standards of Morality 

No teacher can do the best of which he is capable, or 
be in the community the element of strength he should 
become, unless his interests extend beyond the confines 



230 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

of the schoolroom. The needs of his pupils should have 
first place in his thoughts and he should not use the pro- 
fession as a stepping-stone to something else, 
^ut he cannot be of the greatest value to his 



terestsDe- pupils unless his horizon is broader than 

sirable 

mere teaching, as the term is generally un- 
derstood. He must so live and so teach that on going into 
a far country the talents which he has given his pupils 
will not be hid in the earth, but will be used by them so 
as to be a source of additional gain. To do this he must 
constantly keep before himself and his students high stand- 
ards of morality. True education lies not merely in facts 
accumulated, or in the making of intellectual misers, but 
rather in an income investment on the facts learned and 
the turning of them into intellectual capital. The unit 
of measurement is that of moral worth. 
Let the teacher see to it that his contact with life is 
first and foremost of that wholesome, health- 
tul character which makes for moral growth 



to Moral an d strength. It is only when the teacher is 

Standards 

closely in touch with the issues of life, with 
the business and pleasure, the goings and comings, the 
ups and downs of actual living, that he is in a position to 
realize fully the increasing need of advanced standards 
of morality; and it is only under such conditions that he 
is in a position to appreciate the mighty advances that 
have been made and are being made in the moral tone of 
the people everywhere. 
And these increased moral standards are to be realized 



THE TEACHER: TRAINING AND GR( Ml / // 2 y 

only as there is constantly before the mind tin- lofty purpose 
and high ideal as suggested in such lines as: 

" My child, choose well the colors 
Which thou wilt use to-day 
In adding to the painting of thy life; 
And ere thy brush shall trace a single line, 
Be sure that in thy soul there reiens supreme 
The image of that which thou dost long to be." 

(b) Material and Industrial Development 

In the second place, the teacher should keep in touch 
with the growth of our commercial interests. The ma- 
terial development and industrial progress of our country 
should interest every member of the body politic. What- 
ever may be one's rank, station, financial condition or 
profession, it is incumbent upon him not only to take 
an interest in, but to have a share in the great onward 
movement which makes for changed conditions in the 
material world, the better to understand fully the effect 
produced upon the individual and upon society. 

It is needless for school people longer to ignore these 
vast industrial movements; indeed it is all but criminal 
to keep apart from these stupendous forces that, whether 
we approve or not, must go forward and help to shape 
the moral thought and mental warp and woof of all 
human understanding. The attitude, the tendencies, 
the achievements of the individual, in whatever field he 
may labor, are largely influenced and shaped by this 
industrial feeling; and our lives, as the days come and go, 
are shot through and through by the achievements in the 



232 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

industrial world. The teacher must keep thoroughly in 
touch with the movements and forces that mean so much 
to the progress of a people. 

Problems of heating, lighting and ventilation, of trans- 
portation by land and water, of the distribu- 
ti n f water su PPty> are constantly to be met 
be consid- an d solved. The postal, telegraph, cable and 
telephone service, sanitary conditions, labor- 
saving devices and instruments and machines that do 
the work of many men in so short a time as to make it 
unbelievable; these must be perfected. Improvement is 
the order of the day in printing, in making articles of 
clothing, and of shelter, in converting raw materials into 
usable products; in manufacture, agriculture, mining, 
lumbering; in machinery and appliances everywhere. 
The cause and progress of war and the reasons for the 
establishment and reign of peace must be understood. 
No teacher can expect to hold himself apart from the 
resistless movement industrial-wise and still retain his 
hold upon the normal boy in this modern age. 

(c) Esthetic Feeling 

By aesthetic feeling, the third element going to make 
up the contact with life's issues, I mean appreciation of 
and actual participation in the best and noblest and love- 
liest which the world has to give in song and story and 
conversation, in color and harmony, in landscape and 
animal and plant. Sunlight and shade, bird song and word 
picture, towering cathedral and mountain torrent, all are 



THE TEACHER: TRAINING AND GK<)\\ I II 233 

inspiring and uplifting; and it is contact with the 
tlu u-acluT needs to strengthen his love for the 
and to help him to keep the ears and eyes and sen 
ties of his pupils ever attuned to those sights and sound, 
that go to make up the beautiful life. 
The thing aesthetic is the thing cultural; the true and 
the right, if useful, are cultural. Each day 
Elements tne teacher should renew and rein spin- him- 
self by drinking in the beauties of nature or 
of art or music that he may keep fresh and optimistic. 
These things make for culture, which is the capacity for 
nobler thinking, for higher ideals, for keener sensibilities, 
for deeper sympathies. Culture is exemplified in a grow- 
ing spirit of tolerance for the less opportunitied or more 
unfortunate than ourselves; it aims at an increased ap- 
preciation of inspiring music, uplifting art, ennobling 
literature, strengthening oratory. Abhorrence of wrong 
and love of right are its trainbearers and without it cannot 
be had that true, strong, helpful character which makes 
for success and joy and peace. 

E. READING CIRCLES, EXTENSION COURSES, CORRESPOND- 
ENCE AND SUMMER SCHOOLS 

To grow and keep abreast of the times the teacher must 
read and study and investigate. He can do much by him- 
self, but in company with others working along similar 
lines he may accomplish more. As an institution of culture 
and learning, the reading circle, if properly conducted, is 
of value. If a book or syllabus is to be studied, much 



234 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

profitable work may be done in the reading circle, but 
having chosen the book for study, the problem of organ- 
ization must be carefully considered, or the work will be 
aimless and lacking in results. It is always best to select 
a leader, one who will hold argument or discussion within 
bounds, and who will keep the members from drifting 
away from the point under consideration. To obtain the 
greatest good trivial detail must be eliminated, and each 
member must contribute. 

The extension course is sometimes of the "get rich 
quick" character and is amusing and entertaining only. 
Again, the well-selected extension course for which one 
prepares and submits reports, is an element of intrinsic 
worth, and one to be reckoned with educationally. If 
the teacher finds opportunity, he may with slight ex- 
penditure of time and money gain benefit and inspira- 
tion. 

The correspondence school has long since passed the 
experimental stage. Thousands of people the country 
over have registered and pursued courses in one or another 
of our correspondence schools. For those who have not 
had the advantage of adequate school training or who 
find themselves delinquent in a particular field, the ad- 
vantages of correspondence work are many. Care must 
be exercised, however, in the choosing of the 
subject to be studied, as certain lines of 



correspond- work lend themselves to correspondence in- 

enceWork .... , 

struction while others do not. A course 
in manual training by correspondence is one of the an- 



THE TEACHER: TRAINING \ \i> GSM / // 235 

nounccmcntsnvcntly made and would bealmod as i 
lous as to attempt lo teach morals and dims in thi., 
secondhand manner. History, civics, mechanical draw- 
ing, bookkeeping and certain other subjects may be pur- 
sued with profit under the direction of the well-cond 
correspondence school. 

The summer school is more of a problem to the teacher, 
although it presents greater opportunities than does the 
reading circle or the extension course. The assumption is 
that the teacher needs rest and quiet during the vaca- 
tion period; and then it is that the summer 
The summer school is active. It is nevertheless the fact 

School its 

Advantages tn ^t the summer school may offer the work 
of which the teacher stands in need, and ai 
the same time furnish the opportunity for the change 
which is itself recreation. Especially is the summer 
school valuable to the out-of-town teacher, the one who 
needs contact with people and books, music and activity. 
To such a student or teacher, the four or six weeks of the 
summer school may be of inestimable value, and to those 
who cannot afford the advantage of advanced study 
during the school year, it supplies that which they 
would otherwise remain without. The sum- 
Dangers mer Sc h 00 i student must be cautious lest he 

from Over- f 

work in the overestimate his powers of accomplishment, 
scho^ Should he overwork during his summer 

course he will not return to his classes with 
the vigor and enthusiasm they have a right to expect of 
him. 



236 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

F. TEACHERS' MEETINGS, INSTITUTES AND CONVENTIONS 

The teachers' meeting of twenty years ago is rapidly 
passing, although in counties and towns of the isolated 
districts will still be found the traditional 
Sf e e Net and institute. Where the meeting or conven- 
tion occurs at a stated time, and all the 
teachers in a town or district are compelled by law to at- 
tend each session of the entire meeting, which covers a 
period of several days or a week, it loses its power for 
good. The teacher who has just completed a term of 
work needs rest rather than enforced attendance upon 
lectures, where he listens perhaps to one who knows 
less about the subject that he is presenting than does 
the listener himself. On the other hand, no factor lends 
itself better to the improvement of teaching, or is better 
suited to keep the teachers happy and contented or to 
make them progressive and enthusiastic, than the well- 
ordered teachers' convention. Those who complain that 
attendance at an institute is a complete loss of time 
have been unhappy in their selection of lecture or speaker, 
or have gone in the spirit of criticism. We get from a 
thing largely in proportion as we carry to it; and no one 
is so well informed but that he may get some word of 
help or encouragement from the lesson or sermon or 
lecture to which he listens. 

An element not to be disregarded is that of friendships 
formed, of companionships, of associations, and of the 
renewed spirit which comes from the large number 



THE TEACHER: TRAINING AND GROWTH 237 

gathered for one purpose. While it is the indi 

who must do his own work, nevertheless the 
N^mlera 6 teacher who, failing to see results and do 
ing in his own mind the outcome of hi 
forts, sees in the great body of those who engage in the 
same great undertaking, the forecast of final acl 
ment; and he carries with him to his work the hope and 
faith in humankind that was slipping from him. 

It is often best for the teacher to listen to the exposition 
of those subjects which he himself does not teach, or for 
which he is not responsible, the better to see the rela- 
tion of other subjects to his own, and to appreciate the 
value and worth of such subjects and note the applica- 
tion of method. More and more, as the purely th 
ical attitude of the institute is being displaced by work of 
an eminently practical nature, by a setting forth of the 
real problems and the results of experience and investi- 
gation, the teachers' meeting is coming to be of great 
value. 

G. QUALITIES ESSENTIAL TO GROWTH 

(a) Honesty 

It is, in a sense, well-nigh impossible to designate this 
or that particular individual characteristic as the one 
necessary to success in that mental workshop, the school. 
Among what I shall call the essential qualities in the 
teacher's make up, however, honesty, integrity and truth 
stand out as being of first importance. I have not in 



238 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

mind the from-time-to-time honesty, practised by many, 
the kind that works under certain conditions and lapses 
at intervals, a variety of Sunday honesty, if you please. 
No doubt we are all more or less inclined to reach our 
high watermark of absolute truthfulness at rare intervals, 
just as our mental or physical selves attain their maximum 
efficiency only from time to time, sweeping back to the ordi- 
nary standards of everyday life. What I have in mind is 
the clean-cut, out-in-the-open honesty that is active ever 
and always, not simply when a great point is at issue. 

" This above all : to thine own self be true, 
And it must follow, as the night the day, 
Thou canst not then be false to any man." 

Most of us will be honest and truthful in matters of serious 
import, though we do not stick to the truth so readily 
in word or deed, when the trifling circumstances or in- 
significant matter is in question. There are few who 
defraud a neighbor of a large bill; but it is thought to 
be a matter of equity to defraud the street car company 
out of the five cent fare which the conductor thinks he 
has collected. 

Especially among teachers should an absolutely strict 
standard of honesty be adhered to; and no teacher who 
works under less than this absolute standard could create 
in the mind of his pupils the ideals they should possess. 

It ought not to be a matter of extraordinary comment 
that this or that individual be spoken of as strictly honest. 
Indeed, the rare thing and the one to draw comment 



THE TEACHl.R. TRAINING AND GROWTH 239 

should be the statement thai a given man was not abso- 
lutely dependable. If each human being were as honest 
and truthful and reliable as he would \\ i h hi.-, IV How to 
be when dealing with him, how mightily impro\ 
we find our standards. 

But on the part of the teacher particularly, this atti- 
tude of truthfulness must be real, not sugar o 
If there is pretense or sham, the first to become av, i 
it will be the pupil; and the effect upon him is anything 
but good, as he loses confidence in the one who should 
be his model. 

Alice 'Gary says: 

"True worth is in being, not seeming, 
In doing each day that goes by 
Some little good, not in dreaming 
Of great things to do, bye and bye 
For whatever men say in their blindness 
And spite of the fancies of youth 
There's nothing so kingly as kindness 
And nothing so royal as truth." 

(b) Open-Mindedness 

A quality absolutely essential to the teacher, if growth 
is to keep pace with experience, is that of open-minded- 
ness. The attitude exemplified by the statement, "I 
am willing to be convinced, but you will 
find Jt impossible to convince me," does 
vs. i Know no t militate in the direction of develop- 
ment and growth. The teacher must be 
stable, to be sure; he must not be turned by every theory 
and statement that confronts him, but he must ever be 



240 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

ready and willing to know more; and to do this, no idea 

or whim of his should be too sacred to be displaced by 

one containing a larger measure of truth. 

"If I were to frame a text," said Colonel Parker, "it 

would be, 'O God, preserve me from the foregone, conclu- 
sion.' " What the Colonel styled the suspended 
judgment, a mind attitude that shows a will- 



Scant Evi- ingness to believe in oneself, but reserves, 

dence . . . . . . .. 

at the same time, critical judgment until 
the evidence is all in, this helps to constitute the open 
mind. No mind can be great that draws its conclusions 
only to meet those already formed. The teacher who is 

honest and sincere need have no fear of 

STSS^of bein S looked u P n as lackin g in strength 
the Great o f character, if he is ever ready to receive 

TVTitiH 

and give consideration to advice and counsel 
from any source whatsoever. Only a small mind can 
be self -centered and self-satisfied. The great mind is 
always open to catch the ray that flashes out in word or 
act or accomplishment, and so to focus it as to increase 
its brilliancy and power. 

(c) Spirit of Absolute Responsibility 

The matter of responsibility has its roots firmly in 
what has already been discussed under honesty and 
open-mindedness. The strictly honest, absolutely truth- 
ful man is the responsible man, responsible in so far as 
his knowledge and capacity are concerned. The man 
who, knowing the right or the line of action that should 



THE TEACHER: TRAINING AND (,l<o\\l n , 

be pursued, deviates from or ignores it, can in no measure 
be considered as possessing the spirit of responsibility. 

Dr. Andrew S. Draper sets forth admirably the dis- 
tinction between the responsible character and the 
lacking in this respect. He says : 

"In the winter of 1891-92, a train, for some trivial 
reason, came to an unusual stop near the village of 
Hastings on the New York Central and Hudson River 
Railroad, at perhaps the most beautiful and historic part 
of the Hudson River Valley. The unusual stoppage of 
the train created the occasion for the exercise of unusual 
care. The rules of the company were explicit. It be- 
came the immediate duty of the trainman who had 
charge of the rear platform, to take his lantern and go 
back and warn any approaching train. Mere stick that 
he proved himself to be, if he had only followed his 
orders all would have been well. It was dark, but not 
stormy. There was no excuse. If he had possessed 
any of the spirit which the public has the right to expect 
of a trainman, he would have met the occasion and pro- 
tected his train, orders or no orders. He had no spirit ; 
he disobeyed his orders ; the through express crashed 
through the rear of the standing train, a score of people 
were killed, and as many more maimed and mangled for 
life. 

" Late in the afternoon of the next day after this unfor- 
tunate occurrence, I left Albany to come West, in the 
last car of the second section of the southwestern limited 
express. The two trains, making more than forty miles 

Standards 16 



242 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

an hour, were less than ten minutes apart. The weather 
had become very cold, the wind was blowing a gale, and 
the snow was so thick that one could not see the length 
of a car. When in the snow belt between Utica and 
Syracuse, the engineer whistled so sharply and the air 
brakes were set so suddenly, and with such terrific effect, 
that it was evident there was serious occasion for an 
abrupt stop. As the train slowed up and stopped, the 
cries of a man were heard outside. Opening the rear 
door the figure of a man with unlighted lamps, climbed 
up into the vestibule and fell upon the platform ex- 
hausted. His emotions were uncontrollable, and he con- 
tinually murmured, < I stopped her, he saw me ; I brought 
her down.' Assisting him inside the car, we slowly 
gathered the facts. This was the rear trainman on the 
first section of our double train. His train had over- 
hauled a freight wreck and had been obliged to stop. 
The circumstances were appalling, the danger was immi- 
nent, but the man who was responsible proved equal to 
the emergency. He buttoned up his coat, took his 
lamps and ran up the track into the darkness and the 
blinding storm. If he had obeyed his orders in a per- 
functory way only, it would have been of no avail. His 
lamps were blown out, and he exhausted his last match 
in vain efforts to relight them in the wind. Only unu- 
sual resources would now distinguish him from any 
tramp, in the mind of the engineer. But his spirit rose 
to the occasion. Removing his coat and taking that in 
one hand and his lightless lamps in the other, he ran on up 



illL TEACHER: TRAINING AND GROWTH 243 

the track. Soon our train came in sight. ! I 
the track ; he got within the glare of the headlight ; he 
frantically swung his lamps and his coat llooed 

with all his might to the monarch in the cab ; he : 
the whistle of the engine and heard the brakes take hold, 
got off the track as the train was close upon him, and, 
as it stopped, was helped into the last car. That was 
spirit. It had saved his train; perhaps ours also."* 

An illustration in line with the above and emphasizing 
the necessity for a more universally recognized spirit of 
responsibility, is fresh in my mind. On the night of the 
New Year, 1905, I left Chicago, traveling southward on 
the Illinois Central Railroad. Late in the evening, and 
after most of the occupants of the car had retired, our 
engine whistled sharply and the train soon stopped. After 
a few minutes delay, I left my seat and stepped out upon 
the track. As a lamp burned away up toward the en- 
gine, I made my way forward and saw a half dozen men 
standing on either side of a dark object. Pushing my 
way within the circle I asked, " Is he dead ? " As no one 
seemed to know, I endeavored to ascertain. Inquiry as 
to the location of the nearest station sent a trainman back 
to search. The unfortunate ' tramp ' was carried to the 
small station close by, but our engine had done its work. 
Lingering to the last I stepped upon the train with one 
of the brakemen ; and there were tears in his eyes as he 
turned to me and said : " The third man this train has 
killed this week." 

* Proceedings California Teachers Association, 1897, pp. 



244 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

This then is lack of the sense of responsibility, or of 
spirit, if you please, lack on the part of the 



Mift P Lack man w ^ overns t ^ ie en g me it m ay be ; lack 
ing AII on the part of the company that requires or 



permits too many consecutive hours of duty 
without sufficient rest, or failure on the part 
of the employee to refuse duties for which he is unfitted ; 
lack exemplified in a time schedule fitted for speed rather 
than for safety, and brought about by the demands of the 
public, or the intense desire for the "almighty dollar " by 
the railroad stockholders ; lack shown in toleration of a 
system that permits a man to purchase the liquor that 
renders him oblivious to the oncoming train ; somewhere 
there is a lack, a sad, criminal, inexcusable lack of respon- 
sibility ; and until the teacher, having learned to practise 
this virtue, shall thus be enabled, little by little, to incul- 
cate in the pupils the same spirit, we may not expect the 
day to dawn when in practice as well as in theory, re- 
sponsibility will be the watchword of our everyday ex- 
istence. 

(d) Fearlessness Simplicity 

As I write, the realization is forced upon me that while 
it is a simple thing to talk of fearlessness 
and its value in the make-up of the teacher, 



the Doctrine it is at the same time a difficult task to prac- 

of Fearless- A . , . P , , . . . ,. . 

tise this fearlessness and this simplicity. 



Here again, only the absolutely honest, open- 
minded, responsible person can be absolutely fearless in 



THE TEACHER: TRAINING AND GROWTH 245 

matters of principle; able to stand against m and 

slander and censure and wrong; willing to be on the 
" losing side" to maintain the right. To fo 
means that one must practise simplicity, live tin .simple 
life, and if this be the aim of the teacher, he mu 
himself, and not merely an imitator. 
It is no easy matter to be fearless, to be simple, to be 
oneself. Each personality is the person- 

und^faT 1 alit y of the one to whom il ke 101 ^ 8 - i 
Conditions personality cannot be defined; it is the you 

as you. " Human imagination has r. 
fathomed the depth of human possibility;" but only as a 
teacher is fearless, lives his own life, is himself in sim- 
plicity and truth, can he be other than an imitator. 

"By thine own soul's law learn to live; 
And if men thwart thee, take no heed; 
And if men hate thee, take no care; 
Sing thine own song and do thy deed." 

Be not conventional, live your own life, act your own 
part, be fearless for the right and in what you believe 
for the best welfare of those for whom you are respon- 
sible; stand for something and for a principle and for 
yourself. 

This story is told of Dore*, the famous painter, when 
at one time he was in the Swiss Alps. As he stood one 
day upon a mountain crest, seeking a spot from which 
to sketch his picture, he was approached by a keeper of 
the mountains and told that he could not remain. " But," 
said Dore, "I mean no harm. I am an artist." "You 



246 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

must move on," said the keeper. "I am Dore," replied 
the artist; "see, here is my easel, these are my brushes 
and palette; I would paint this scene." "No," replied 
the keeper, "you are not Dore. You must away. If 
you are Dore, paint for me this view." Then Dor 
took his brush, and with a few strokes of his master hand 
there lived upon the canvas, mountain and valley, tree 
and sky, so real as to leave no room for doubt. Rapt 
with wonder and admiration the keeper said: "You 
are Dore. No one but Dore could do that. You may 
stay." 

(e) Tactfulness 

The teacher without tact is not a teacher. Seem- 
ingly insurmountable difficulties may be conquered if the 
teacher possesses what we speak of as a tactful disposition. 
By tact is meant not simply the ability to say and do 
those things that please the hearer, but the 
abi %> natural or acquired, to say and do 



and Right the right thing on a given occasion. In 

Action . . . . . . 

conversation, in business, in society, in the 
professional world, everywhere is there trouble and dis- 
cord and discontent and misunderstanding because of 
lack of tact on the part of this or that individual. While 
tact is necessary in successful dealing with men, it is 
much more essential in successful dealing with pupils; 
and if the teacher does not possess the intuitive, tactful 
sense, he must endeavor to cultivate it. 

Children are oftentimes quick to resent a seeming 



THE TEACHER: TRAINING AM 

wrong when no wrong is intended; they an- n<>i . 
amenable to the same line of argument or to the same 
kind and character of discipline or educational method; 
the home life, the street and playground existence and the 
school atmosphere differ widely one from the 
parent deals with the pupil in a different manner than 
does the teacher; all these reasons combine to make it 
essential that the teacher use reason and judgment and 
tact in his work, else there will likely be open revolt or 
secret discontent, or progress be less rapid than could be 
desired. 

Lack of tact on the teacher's part results frequently 
in lack of cooperation between parent and school author- 
ities. The pupil will often report to his teacher that 
father or mother was taught so and so, 
E^ght word 6 an d that their experience dictates a method 
in Dealing verv unlike the one advised by text or teacher. 

witn Parents 

If the teacher under such conditions uses 
tact and judgment, he may avoid any attempt at contro- 
versy, leave the pupil with confidence in parents and 
school methods alike, and gain, rather than lose, the 
support of the home. 

Often, too, the pupil is in a disturbed mental and phys- 
ical condition, unknown to himself perhaps. The ordi- 
nary manner of dealing with him will not bring results, 
and the teacher must be quick to grasp the situation and 
ready to meet the emergency of the moment. 

Letters from parents or oral communications sent by 
pupils are often of the nature to bring quick, impulsive 



248 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

retorts from the teacher. It is seldom wise to reply in a 
spirit of retaliation, as the tactful thing said in the right 
way may gain rather than lose the parent as an ally of 
the school. 

The writer calls to mind an incident which illustrates 
the extremity in which a teacher may find himself if he 
is less than tactful. A village graded school, 



. n W j 1 j c ] 1 fe was associated with several 
other teachers, was built with chimneys 
lower than the gable of the roof, and as a result on windy 
days, the smoke was drawn down the chimney, and one 
or another room was uncomfortable in consequence. 
Frequent appeals to the Board seemed to be of no avail; 
and one day, before the intermission, the smoke so filled 
certain rooms that it was decided to dismiss school should 
the trouble not abate. When the session began, how- 
ever, the wind had so changed that little indication of 
smoke remained, and the pupils under the writer's im- 
mediate charge were allowed to determine whether this 
condition should be endured or the windows opened to 
relieve immediately the situation. The weather being ex- 
tremely cold, the former alternative was chosen and all 
went well until some one began a slight cough. This was 
soon taken up by another and another until the whole 
room was engaged in a violent fit of coughing. 

Realizing the futility of an attempt to put an end to 
a cough, as such a demonstration is as legitimate as is 
winking or swallowing, the question of what was to be 
done was of chief concern. If the pupils gained their 



THE TEACHER: TRAINING AND GROWTH 249 

point, viz., were able to draw the teacher into a threat 
or entreaty, the power of the latter would be weakened. 
Suddenly the teacher found it necessary to cough, lightly 
at first, but soon more and more, until he with 
announced the raising of a window a necessity. The 
smoke continued to affect him; and the windows, one 
after another, were raised until pupil after pupil asked 
permission to procure coat or wrap; their requests 
granted, of course. It is needless to say that long ere this, 
all coughing on the pupils' part had ceased; but the teacher, 
still continuing to be irritated by the smoke, kept up 
the play until warned by the shivering pupils it would 
be unsafe to do so longer. Later, at the noon hour, a 
group of interested pupils were heard discussing tho 
matter. Some insisted the presence of the smoke made 
necessary the coughing by the teacher, but others were 
just as certain there was another reason for his action. 
Discipline in the room was a simple matter thereafter. 

(f) Willingness to Practise the Gospel of Work 

People may be classed, first, as those always willing 
to help, and second, those just as willing to receive assist- 
ance. Those of the first class are workers. They are the 
men and women who accomplish things, who approach 
a task, not in a half-hearted way, but who enter with 
their full strength and energy into its accomplishment. 

To-day I rode down street with a busy professional 
man. He inquired from house to house for a family 
of whom he was in search, that he might give them 



250 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

books and magazines of which they were in need. A 
man who resided next door to this almost 
destitute family could give us no infor- 



othersCom- mation. From the carriage I watched this 

mendable 

man as he walked to his business. Seeing 
a morning paper upon a lawn, he made his way to it 
and scanned the headlines; and starting on, he took 
from his pocket a pair of scissors and clipped roses 
from the bushes of private owners as he passed along. 
Here were the two types, the professional 
man wno > out f a DUSV day, found time to 
help the less fortunate than himself, and the 
man unacquainted with his neighbor, willing to read the 
morning paper of another and to pick flowers not intended 
for him. 

Work is the secret of success. The teacher who has 
an "easy time" will not succeed; and the one who returns 
home at night care free and without weariness may be 
envied, but has certainly not been accomplishing the 
most of which he is capable. 

Work, too, is the secret of happiness. None is so 
miserable as he without work. Optimism 

Work, not i i < , , 

Leisure, con- anc * happiness come from active partici- 
Ha CiV fnl P ation i n life's battles. It will do every 
teacher good to feel that work 

". . . . is the shape forever set between 
The thought and form, the vision and the deed; 
The hidden light, the glory all unseen, 
I bring to mortal senses, mortal need. 



THE TEACHER: TRAINING AND GROWTH 251 

" Who loves me not, my sorrowing slave shall be, 
Bent with a burden, knowing oft the rod; 
But he who loves me shall my Master Ixj, 
And use me with the joyance of a God. 

" Man's lord or servant, still I am his friend; 
Desire for me is simple as his breath; 
Yea, waiting old and toilless for the end, 
He prays that he may find me after death." 

But after all, the best work can be done by the teacher 
who has learned the art of play and who practises the 
Periods of g s P e l of wor k as well. It is the halfway 
Eeiaxation measures that do not lead to success. Pe- 
Great AC- riods of absolute change and relaxation are 
compiish- essential to successful accomplishment. Spen- 
cer says: "Hereafter, when this age of active 
material progress has yielded mankind its benefits, there 
will, I think, come a better adjustment of labor and en- 
joyment. Among reasons for thinking this, there is the 
reason that the progress of evolution throughout the or- 
ganic world at large, brings an increasing surplus of ener- 
gies that are not absorbed in fulfilling material needs, 
and points to a still larger surplus for the humanity of 
the future ... In brief, I may say that we have had 
somewhat too much of 'the gospel of work/ It is time 
to preach the gospel of relaxation." * 

This "gospel of relaxation" of which Spencer speaks, 
should be heeded more particularly by the workers. 
It is practised altogether too strenuously by the majority 
of the others. Keeping at it steadily, continuous work 

* Essays, " The Americans." 



252 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

with sufficient relaxation, a determination to stick to the 
thing, will bring success. This success will come, not 
in overburdening the mind or in consuming the time 
with useless details, but in carefully selecting the main 
issues and in looking after the little things of impor- 
tance. 

You recall that story of the man, who in the morn- 
ing of life set out to win success. With face toward 
the mountain top and a determination to reach the sum- 
mit, where to his mind, success awaited 
him, he traveled on. Small duties were 



successes?- pushed aside, trivial obligations were ig- 

niustration 

nored as he journeyed. The meridian of 
life was passed and the declining sun bespoke the even- 
ing of his earthly span, but still he pushed on, and 
an old man now, weary and white with years, he saw 
at last before him the mountain peak of his desire. 
And as by a final effort he reached the crest, and worn 
and spent he paused to rest, a form approached him and 
said, "What seek ye?" And the man replied, "I have 
toiled and climbed that I might win success. Day by 
day and year after year have I labored and at last the 
heights are gained. Tell me, where may success be 
found?" "Alas," came the answer, "in your great 
desire for success you have missed her. Ignoring all 
that goes to make life great and successful and worth 
while, you have cast aside the gems that when assembled 
would form the crown; see yonder along the path by 
which you came;" and looking far, far below, through 



77/7-; TEACHER: TRAINING AND GROWTH 253 

the evening light to the valley, success could be seen 
shining from a thousand hills. 

(g) Order and System 

Our one great cry is lack oj time. There is so much 
to do and so little time in which to accomplish it. 
Teachers are constantly deploring the fact that they lack 
time in which to perform properly necessary 
tasks, or to teach adequately even the 
ments of a given subject. It is true that 
we may expect too much of a pupil or a teacher, and it 
is just as true that waste of time should be considered 
as is waste of energy in a machine. The maximum of 
work for a minimum of energy expended is always of 
first consideration. to the man at the governor. The max- 
imum of accomplishment, with understanding, in the 
shortest space of time and with the best results to the 
individual should be the aim. 

Method is a mighty time saver. The teacher who 

proceeds methodically, who is orderly and systematic 

and who plans his lessons with the same 

nicet Y aS the ^g^ 1661 P lanS hls P ro JC ct 

or the architect his house, and who tries 
to find a reason for each step he takes, will accomplish 
much more than he who is unsystematic and relies upon 
circumstances to point him his method of procedure. 

The teacher who is careless and haphazard will al- 
ways be behind time. No one doubts for a moment the 
ability of a great corporation to carry on a business 



254 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

successfully; and no one doubts that it is in the great 
corporation that most use is made of labor 
an( ^ time-saving devices, and that every ef- 
fort militates in the direction of the largest 
output. It would be an object lesson to the careless, 
unsystematic teacher to visit a large, successful man- 
ufacturing plant and note how each workman has his 
allotted task to perform. His tools are sharp and of the 
best pattern, the equipment he uses is placed in posi- 
tions of the greatest advantage, and every implement 
or piece of material he manipulates has its own particular 
place. The thing done quickest is not necessarily that 
which saves most time; so each tool, after use, is returned 
to its respective place, that it may be found without 
delay when again required. 

Regularity and punctuality are essential to large accom- 
plishment. Begin on time and close promptly. Have 
a time for everything. Have a plan and work to it. 
A few minutes given regularly to a task will soon bring 
returns. An education may be secured by utilizing the 
time that is absolutely wasted. 

One of the most successful business men of the country 
told me recently that it is the policy of one of his busi- 
ness acquaintances to excuse no associate or employee 
who " misses a train." There is, he says, no excuse 
for missing a train. An accident may delay a train upon 
which one is riding, but to miss a train when in full 
knowledge of the time of departure is something not to 
be excused, 



THE TEACHER: TRAINING AND GROWTH 255 

Do not let your work crowd you; < 
Don't get behind. "Do it now" is a good maxim to fol- 
low. If several interests aiv being pursued at a given 
time, one main issue should always be kept in view. Be 
thorough, be exact, be orderly and save time by having a 
carefully tried plan; thus you will accomplish much. 

(h) Discrimination, Concentration, Judgment 

Not because it is the least important of the st 
qualities mentioned is that of discrimination placed last 
in the list. An analytic, discriminating mind is indis- 
pensable to the most successful teaching. An ability to 
see things in their proper perspective, to place fair esti- 
mates, to calculate just proportions, in fact to have that 
delicate poise and balance without which the elusive thing 
called judgment is impossible, these are of the utmost 
value, and indispensable to large success in any field of 
human activity. 

What has been spoken of as open-mindedness, and an 
appreciation of order and system, go far toward building 
up the sense of discrimination. Truly the discriminating 
mind is apt to be the broad mind. To dis- 
i*Tge7m- f criminate one must lose sight of the petty 
port should things of life, he must pick out the great from 

Hold the i 

stage the trivial, he must accept circumstances as 

they are thrust upon him, not in the spirit of 
helplessness, but only to conquer and free himself from 
the bondage of annoyance and grievances; he must rise 
superior to difficulties, and gain that calm repose of spirit 



256 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

that carries with it the power of achievement and of 
conviction among his fellows. Strength of purpose is rec- 
ognized in such a mind, and its possessor gains the con- 
fidence, love and loyalty of his pupils. Unless the teacher 
is discriminating, has good judgment and uses 
anTsympa- ^, he cannot hope to appreciate the viewpoint 
thy Essential o f the pupil. He must keep fresh and sympa- 

in a Teacher 

thetic and be ever ready to receive the best. 
If the teacher is happy and hopeful, his pupils will be so. 
The pessimist casts a gloom upon all about him, and the 
pupils under such a teacher long for the freedom of the 
active world. 

"The pessimist, all steeped in woe, 
Sits down and mourns, 
Because no fragrant rose can blow 
Without its thorns. 
The optimist shouts gleefully 
Because he knows 

That where the thorns are growing, he 
May find the rose." 

By judgment I mean not only quick judgment but 
clear judgment. That weighing of values, that clear, un- 
biased discrimination, or rather lack of it, was admirably 
illustrated in a recent convention of teachers. 
An Example An able paper, touching the possible elimina- 
judgment tions from the curricula of the grammar and 
high schools, had been presented; and able 
men and women had been chosen to lead the discussion. 
The first speaker agreed with the general tenor of the 
paper; he would eliminate much of the work as now taken 



THE TV-J.K ///A': TRAINING AND Gl:<)\\ 1 ,1 257 

up, but there was one school subject that must not be 
given a shorter time allowance on the program; in fact, he 
favored an increase of time, and as he proceeded in his 
argument we learned he was a specialist in the line he 
sought to magnify. Another speaker held views of similar 
character regarding the curriculum in general, but stoutly 
held for an increased time allowance in one subject, this 
finally proving to be the one he was teaching; and still 
others followed, all specialists, and fearful lest too little 
time be devoted to their respective specialities while ignor- 
ing the value and claims of allied work. 

This appreciation of values, this tendency toward dis- 
crimination, and clearness and readiness in judgment, 
these traits of character have not come by 
accident; and however much we may o 



tive of heredity, education is made up of several parts 

Growing . . ' r 

Minds training, and the power of concentration, if 

not acquired, can be developed and trained. 
Ability to concentrate, to hold the mind and body to the 
completion of a task, carries with it the power of accom- 
plishment. Concentration, followed by a wise discrimina- 
tion and a judgment unhampered by prejudice, is what 
produces the great mind whether it be that of the master 
merchant, the deep philosopher, the wise philanthropist, 
the trusted workman or the skillful teacher. 

Such are the elements that enter into the training of the 
teacher and that constitute his professional growth. Edu- 
cation is the best life insurance policy that can be secured, 
and a true education is dependent upon these elements as 

Standards 17 



258 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

a foundation. If a teacher builds upon these essentials 
of growth, he will be progressive, not like the Scotchman, 
one of a company gathered to discuss the ditching of a 
certain moor that it might be converted into tillable land. 
After many reasons had been advanced in favor of the 
movement, a member of the meeting arose and at the 
close of his speech offered the following argument as 
conclusive evidence against the project: "This moor," said 
he, "has been here since time immemorial." 

Education comes sometimes in spite of the school. We 

may each think differently as to education,. 

but when the evidence is all in and the various 



may be vie- opinions analyzed, they will be found pretty 
much the same after all. It is the best edu- 
cated man who can use all he has, in whatever that all 
may consist; it is he who has judgment, who has grasped 
his subjects, and has poise and breadth. The best edu- 
cated man is he who with discernment and with his 
appreciative quality of mind makes opportunity, or sees 
the opportunity offered, and uses it to worthy ends. The 
thought is expressed in these lines entitled Opportunity, 
by John J. Ingalls. 

"Master of human destinies am I! 
Fame, love and fortune on my footsteps wait, 
Cities and fields I walk : I penetrate 
Deserts and seas remote, and passing by 
Hovel and mart and palace, soon or late 
I knock unbidden once at every gate! 
If feasting, rise; if sleeping, wake before 
I turn away. It is the hour of fate, 
And they who follow me reach every state 



THE TEACHER: TRAINING AND GROWTH 259 

Mortals desire, and conquer rvtry foe 
Save death. But those who doubt or hesitate, 
Condemned to failure, ix.>nury and woe, 
Seek me in vain and ceaselessly implore; 
I answer not and I return no mor. 

H. THE RECOMPENSE 

And what of the rewards of the teacher ? Is his recom- 
pense to be reckoned in terms of dollars and cents? The 
laborer is worthy of his hire, and it is quite legitimate 
indeed that a teacher consider financial remuneration. 
No one thoroughly acquainted with the teacher's work 
and what is expected of him and what accomplished by him, 
would for a moment question the inadequacy of salaries 
paid. But material gain is only one and certainly not the 
chief element to be considered, for if salary was the iu-m 
of prime concern, the great mass of our teachers would 
soon engage in more lucrative undertakings. Kipling 
gives the lie to the belief that all teachers are in the work 
for what they get out of it financially, when he says in his 
characteristic manner: 

"If teaching was what teaching seems 
And not the teaching of our dreams, 
But only putty, brass, and paint, 
How quick we'd drop her! But she ain't!" 

Honor and position are considerations worthy our 
attention, but while these are desirable, tlv 
cannot be fully paid in coin of such standard. While 
respected always and usually considered a leader, tlu-rv 
are those who still look upon the teacher as a servant 



260 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

merely, a workman with his books for tools and his mis- 
sion to deal out facts, to correct errors and to enforce 
discipline. Honor and position certainly do not call our 
best teachers to the work, or keep them in the educa- 
tional arena, and can furnish no adequate recompense 
for labors performed. The teacher's recompense must 
lie elsewhere. It must lie in a knowledge of things at- 
tempted and a hope of results achieved. These results 
may not seem to be as far-reaching as could be desired 
or as apparent as would be the case in the world of in- 
dustry or commerce or finance, but the knowledge of 
things attempted and the faith in final success should 
prove to every teacher the value of his efforts and warrant 
him in being steadfast in the belief that he who molds 
the man is greater than he who plans and builds and 
achieves in the material world, and that his work is the 
more enduring. In casting up his accounts, the true 
teacher will be able to say: 

1 'My struggling soul may never gain the prize 

It covets so; 
It may not reach the gates of Paradise 

At sunset's glow; 
But I have faith that in the shadows blue 

At set of sun, 
I shall be judged by what I've tried to do, 

Not what I've done." 

Is the future of our schools in the hands of the teachers ? 
Perhaps not. But the teacher will receive his recompense 
if the life he lives is an example to his pupils and to the 
world. And what is it to be a teacher that the recompense 



THE TEACHER: TRAINING AK i HI 2 6i 

may be his? To be rich in book knowledge? T 
to impart information to others? It means this and it 
means more. To be honest, to be helpful, to be h;: 
to love books and nature, play and work; to be sy 
thetic in spirit, wise in counsel, calm in judgment ; to be 
teachable and tolerant, firm and impartial; to be grateful 
for the past, hopeful for the future and reverent toward 
all that is; to have ideas and to reach out toward the best; 
to take counsel of the wise whether young or old, rich or 
poor, high or low; to help rather than hinder, and to 
encourage not dishearten; to dare nothing selfish, or 
vicious, or unworthy; to be joyous and optimistic al 
and to practise that freshness of disposition and exemplify 
that strength of purpose that makes each feel that his own 
life is beating in unison with the heart throbs of a uni- 
verse; this it means. To approach the ideal our 
must be broad and tolerant, our patience without limit, 
our energy great and our interest in the work and love for 
the child deep and abiding. 

THESES 

1. Psychology is of value in teaching when its laws are 
known and applied. 

2. Experience is necessary, but it is not the only teacher. 

3. The academic atmosphere of the secondary school 
and the professional atmosphere of the normal school 
contrasted. 

4. To grow, the teacher must read good books, and 
choose worthy associates. 



262 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

5. The teacher must cultivate high moral standards, 
keep in touch with industrial progress, and educate his 
finer sensibilities. 

6. The value of "outside" school courses, 

7. Honesty, open-mindedness, responsibility, fearless- 
ness and simplicity, tactfulness, willingness to work, order 
and system, discrimination, concentration and judgment, 
these are qualities that make for growth. 

8. The recompense of the teacher is not to be measured 
in terms of dollars and cents or in social or civic or pro- 
fessional preferment, but in a knowledge of good ac- 
complished. 

TOPICS FOR STUDY 

1. Consider the relative merits of a two years' profes- 
sional course for high school graduates, and a four years' 
course including high school work. 

2. What are the advantages of dividing the normal 
school year into two terms ? Three terms ? 

3. When a teacher possesses both college and pro- 
fessional training, which should precede? 

4. Classify the various educational texts upon the basis 
of treatment of subject-matter or method. 

5. Make a classification of the five most helpful books 
on psychology; on pedagogy, on general education. 

6. Analyze the programs of five typical normal schools 
and list the relative number of hours given to psychology, 
pedagogy, history of education, school management, prac- 
tise-teaching, observation and criticism. 



THE TEACHER: TRAINING AND GROWTH 263 

7. Make a list of the ten books other than those of a ped- 
agogic character, that you would recommend for tea- 

8. Discuss fully the danger to a teacher who dr 
much time to outside interests. Consider in thr same way 
the teacher who centers his whole attention upon his school 
work. 

9. How may the teacher best lead the pupils to an 
appreciation of the necessity for moral, industrial and 
aesthetic understanding ? 

10. Study carefully the courses offered in a correspond- 
ence school. Gather statistics as to numbers enrolled in 
these courses. 

11. What is your experience and observation of the dan- 
ger of overwork on the part of both teachers and pupils? 

12. Are teachers as a rule open to conviction, or are 
they disinclined to receive new light? 

13. Is the prevailing tendency toward simplicity of life 
or the reverse? What are the contributing causes? 

14. Show how the school may help to inculcate the idea 
of the necessity for responsibility. 

15. Discriminate clearly between tact, and methods that 
may be questionable and open to adverse criticism. 

16. In what .particulars may the teacher and pan-nt 
work together for mutual benefit ? 

17. Make a list of those who have accomplished great 
good in various fields of human activity. What of their 
periods of work and relaxation ? Have they been broad 
in their interests or has the particular speciality been 
Drominent in every case ? 



264 STANDARDS IN EDUCATION 

1 8. Go over your own work and habits to determine 
how and where you can with profit be more accurate, 
methodical and systematic. 

19. Are we inclined to overemphasize the value of 
punctuality and attendance at school? 

20. Arrange a program of studies for each grade with 
time allotment, giving attention to relative value of sub- 
jects. 

21. Many of the world's great men have become so 
without the help of the school. Present both sides of the 
question suggested. 

22. Study the salary question and compare with wages 
received by men and women in other lines of work. 

23. Given that the teacher's services are not recog- 
nized as they should be, from a financial point of view, 
in what estimation is the profession held by the world at 
large ? 

CONSULT 

BARE Reasons why Men are Leaving School 

Work, etc. Council of Education, California 
Teachers Association, 1906. 

BRUMBAUGH The Making of a Teacher, chap. 17. 

GIFFIN School Days of the Fifties, chap. 12. 

GORDY New Psychology, chaps. 1,2. 

GREENWOOD Successful Teaching, pp. 27-51. 

HINSDALE The Art of Study, chaps. 21, 22. 

The Training of Teachers Monograph 8, on 
Education in the United States. 

JAMES Talks to Teachers, chap, i, also pp. 191-301, 



Til/: TEACHER: TRAINING A*\ I 265 

K i NTLAND The Teacher and the ! 

ference for Education in the South, 1903, 
pp. 168-176. 

MOORE Science of Study, pp. 153-232. 

O'SHEA Value of Psychology for Teachers. I 

School Teacher, vol. 5, pp. 129-141. 

PAGE Theory and Practice. 

PARKER Talks on Pedagogics, especially pp. 445-451. 

PUTNAM Manual of Pedagogy, chap. 12. 

REPORT OF COMMITTEE ON SALARIES, etc., of Teachers, N. 
E. A., 1905. 

ROYCE Outlines of Psychology, chap. i. 

SEELEY Educational Foundations, chaps, i, 2, 3 & 12. 

SMALL Should Teachers be Required to Present Evi- 

dences of Increased Scholarship? Proceed- 
ings, Department Superintendence, N. E. A., 
1904, pp. 158-164. 

STOUT Manual of Psychology, chaps, i, 2. 

THORNDIKE Principles of Teaching, chap. i. 

VANCE Best Means and Methods of Improving Teach- 

ers. Proceedings, Department Superintend- 
ence, N. E. A., 1906, pp. 102-108. 

VAN SICKLE Basis for Promotion of Teachers. Proceedings, 
Department Superintendence, N. E. A., 
1906, pp. 153-159- 

VINCENT Summer Schools and University Extension- 

Monograph 1 6, on Education in the United 
States. 

WHITE Elements of Pedagogy, pp. 210-215. 

School Management, pp. Q-43- 

WILSON Pedagogues and Parents, chap. 14. 




BOOKS FC{R/ TEACHERS 

By RURICK N. ROAfcrf Ph.D., President Ka.tern 
Kentucky State Normal School, Richmond, Kentucky 



Psychology in Education . 1.00 Method in Education . . fi.oo 
Economy in Education . . $1.00 



ROARK'S PSYCHOLOGY IN EDUCATION pre- 
sents such a clear exposition of the elementary princi- 
ples of psychology and their practical applications in 
methods of education as to furnish a logical and scientific 
basis for the daily work in the class room. Intended for the 
average teacher, it gives a full and logical outline by which 
the teacher may guide his study and lays constant emphasis 
upon the necessity and the means of carrying psychology into 
the schoolroom. 

ff In METHOD IN EDUCATION the author develops 
in detail the applications of psychology in the work of 
teaching. He discusses the principles upon which good 
teaching must be based, and also the means of making the 
subjects in the curriculum produce the best educational results. 
Each branch of study usually taught in elementary schools is 
taken up and considered separately, and much hopeful advice 
is given, supplemented by suggestive outlines, lesson plans, 
and topics. 

^ ECONOMY IN EDUCATION deals with the prob- 
lems confronting the individual teacher in the successful ad- 
ministration of his school, and also the larger problems of the 
school as a part of the institutional life and growth of modern 
society. It discusses the problems of the administration of 
school systems and such matters as taxation, boards of 
education, courses of study, and the distinctive work of 
the different schools. The latest movements in the econom- 
ical correlation of the home, libraries, museums, and art 
galleries with the school are taken up at some length. 



AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 



THE ART OF STUDY 

By B. A. HINSDALE, Ph.D., LL.D., late Professor 
of the Science and the Art of Teaching, University 
of Michigan. 

fl.OO 



THIS book for teachers aims at a definite end : To teach 
pupils how to study rather than to store their minds 
with any particular stock of knowledge. 
*ff It demonstrates in a clear and logical manner the true 
relations which should exist between the teacher and the 
pupil in the schoolroom, and presents practical methods by 
which such relations may be established and maintained. 
As learning is the primary act, and teaching but secondary, 
it proposes a partial readjustment of the existing relations 
between the teacher and the pupil, by which fhe pupil will 
become the distinct and proper center of the school system, 
and everything else teacher, studies, and apparatus sub- 
ordinate to him. 

^f The art of study is much misunderstood and neglected, 
and there are current today in schools many conditions which 
result in serious defects and weaknesses among pupils. 
Many pupils fail in their studies, due chiefly, first to their 
ignorance of how properly to attack a lesson; and, secondly, 
to their inability to sustain the attack when once begun. It 
too often happens that teachers and pupils do not work 
together in the true spirit; that pupils make too little effort to 
learn, while teachers try, apparently, to save them that 
trouble. To overcome these errors and attain the end sought, 
the author demonstrates the proper relations that should exist 
between them, and then presents methods in establishing and 
maintaining these relations. In illustration of these ideas, a 
series of typical study-recitations is given in the book. 
^f The book is rich in practical suggestions for the guidance 
of the teacher, and devotes several chapters to rules and hints 
which will be of great assistance to the pupil as well. 



AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 

(204) 



HISTORY OF EDUCATION 

Ph.D., 
State N 



By LEVI SEELEY, I'rofessor of Pedagogy 

New Jersey State Normal School 



SEELEY'S History of Education is a working book, clear, 
comprehensive, and accurate, and sufficient in itself to 
furnish all the material on the subject that is required by 
any examining board, or that may be demanded in a normal 
or college course. 

*ff Each educational system that has influenced the world is 
taken up and summarized in turn, its development shown, 
and its important lesson pointed out. The fullest information 
obtainable is presented in simple form and expressed in con- 
cise language. The topics are arranged on a well defined 
plan, everything being practical, useful, and directly to the 
point. 

^| In addition, the book includes biographical sketches of the 
great educators with an illuminating account of their systems 
of pedagogy. It also provides a general outline of the 
educational history of ancient countries, and affords com- 
parisons of the educational systems of the leading countries 
down to the present time. In short, the volume gives the 
student an accurate view in perspective of the educational 
progress of the world. Extensive bibliographies of works for 
reference are provided. 

^j The work presents for study many of the great pedagogical 
problems that have interested thoughtful men in every age. 
It shows how some of these have been solved in the past and 
points out the way to the solution of others of no less 
importance in the near future. 

^[ It should form an indispensable volume in every teacher's 
library, for it not only is inspiring, but furnishes valuable 
information. Every well informed teacher must know how 
the past has taught in order to cope intelligently with the 
educational problems of today. 



AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 

(202) 



NEW SERIES OF THE 
NATURAL GEOGRAPHIES 

REDWAY AND HINMAN 

TWO BOOK OR FOUR BOOK EDITION 

Introductory Geography . $0.60 School Geography . . . $1.25 
In two parts, each . . .40 In two parts, each . . .75 



IN the new series of these sterling geographies emphasis is laid 
on industrial, commercial, and political geography, with just 
enough physiography to bring out the causal relations. 
^[ The text is clear, simple, interesting, and explicit. The 
pictures are distinguished for their aptness and perfect illus- 
trative character. Two sets of maps are provided, one for 
reference, and the other for study, the latter having corre- 
sponding maps drawn to the same scale. 
% The INTRODUCTORY GEOGRAPHY develops the 
subject in accordance with the child's comprehension, each 
lesson paving the way for the next. In the treatment of the 
United States the physiographic, historical, political, industrial, 
and commercial conditions are taken up in their respective 
order, the chief industries and the localities devoted largely to 
each receiving more than usual consideration. The country 
is regarded as being divided into five industrial sections. 
<[[ In the SCHOOL GEOGRAPHY a special feature is 
the presentation of the basal principles of physical and general 
geography in simple, untechnical language, arranged in num- 
bered paragraphs. In subsequent pages constant reference is 
made to these principles, but in each case accompanied by 
the paragraph number. This greatly simplifies the work, 
and makes it possible to take up the formal study of these 
introductory lessons after the remainder of the book has been 
completed. With a view to enriching the course, numerous 
specific references are given to selected geographical reading. 



AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 
co 



MILNE'S PROGRESSIVE 
ARITHMETICS 

By WILLIAM J. MILNE, Ph.D., LL.D., President of 

New York State Normal College, Albany, N 



THREE BOOK. SERIES 



First Book ..... $<M5 
Second Book ..... 40 
Third Book ..... 45 



TWO BOOK. SERIES 

First Book f<>-35 

Complete Book . . . .65 



IN these series the best modern methods of instruction have 
been combined with those older features which gave the 
author's previous arithmetics such marvelous popularity. 
^j Built upon a definite pedagogical plan, these books teach 
the processes of arithmetic in such a way as to develop the 
reasoning faculties, and to train the power of rapid, accurate, 
and skillful manipulation of numbers. The inductive method 
is applied, leading the pupils to discover truths for them- 
selves ; but it is supplemented by model solutions and careful 
explanations of each step. 

^J Each new topic is first carefully developed, and then en- 
forced by sufficient practice to fix it thoroughly in the mind. 
The problems, which have been framed with the greatest care, 
relate to a wide range of subjects drawn from modern life and 
industries. Reviews in various forms are a marked feature. 
Usefulness is the keynote. 

^y In the First and Second Books the amount of work that 
may be accomplished in a half year is taken as the unit of 
classification, and the various subjects are treated topically, 
each being preceded by a brief resume of the concepts 
already acquired. In the Third Book the purely topical 
method is used in order to give the pupil a coherent 
knowledge of each subject. The Complete Book covers 
the work usually given to pupils during the last four years 
of school. 



AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 

(57) 



STEPS IN ENGLISH 

By A. C. McLEAN, A.M., Principal of Luckey School, 
Pittsburg; THOMAS C. BLAISDELL, A.M., Pro- 
fessor of English, Fifth Avenue Normal High School, 
Pittsburg; and JOHN MORROW, Superintendent of 
Schools, Allegheny, Pa. 



Book One. For third, fourth, and fifth years $0.40 

Book Two. For sixth, seventh, and eighth years 60 



THIS series presents a new method of teaching language 
which is in marked contrast with the antiquated systems 
in vogue a generation ago. The books meet modern 
conditions in every respect, and teach the child how to ex- 
press his thoughts in language rather than furnish an undue 
amount of grammar and rules. 

^J From the start the attempt has been made to base the work 
on subjects in which the child is genuinely interested. Lessons 
in writing language are employed simultaneously with those in 
conversation, while picture-study, the study of literary selec- 
tions, and letter-writing are presented at frequent intervals. 
The lessons are of a proper length, well arranged, and well 
graded. The books mark out the daily work for the teacher 
in a clearly defined manner by telling him what to do, and 
when to do it. Many unique mechanical devices, e. g. y a 
labor-saving method of correcting papers, a graphic system of 
diagramming, etc., form a valuable feature of the work. 
^[ These books are unlike any other series now on the 
market. They do not shoot over the heads of the pupils, 
nor do they show a marked effort in writing down to 
the supposed level of young minds. They do not contain 
too much technical grammar, nor are they filled with what 
is sentimental and meaningless. No exaggerated attention is 
given to analyzing by diagramming, and to exceptions to ordi- 
nary rules, which have proved so unsatisfactory. 



AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 

(80